Ricoh All in One Printer JP5000 User Guide

Re ducing And Enlarging Using Preset

Ratios

See ⇒ P.30 “Preset Reduce/En-

large—Reducing And Enlarging Us-

ing Preset Ratios”.

❖

Adjusting Print Image Position

See ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting Print Image

Position”.

GRRATI0E

GRPOSI0E

Having The Machine Choose The Re-

production Ratios

See ⇒ P.32 “Auto Magnification Se-

lection—Having The Machine Choose

The Reproduction Ratios”.

*: Paper feed direction

❖

Adjusting Print Image Density

See ⇒ P.26 “Adjusting Print Image

Density”.

Halftone Printing

See ⇒ P.27 “Tint Mode—Halftone

Printing”.

GRAUTO0E

Reducing And Enlarging In 1 % Steps

See ⇒ P.35 “Zoom—Reducing And

Enlarging In 1 % Steps”.

GRTINT0E

❖

Changing The Printing Speed

See ⇒ P.28 “Changing The Printing

Speed”.

GRZOOM0E

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Same Original Using All Stored

Data”.

❖

Stretching And Squeezing The Image

In 1 % Steps

See ⇒ P.37 “Directional Magnifica-

tion—Stretching And Squeezing The

Image In 1 % Steps”.

GRCLAS2E

Making Variable Numbers Of Prints

From The Same Original Using Stored

Data

GRDIRE0E

❖

Erasing Edge Margins

See ⇒ P.40 “Edge Erase—Erasing

Edge Margins”.

See ⇒ P.53 “Auto Class Mode—

Making Variable Numbers Of Prints

From The Same Original Using

Stored Data”.

GRERAS0E

❖

Printing On Various Kinds Of Paper

See ⇒ P.42 “Printing On Various

Kinds Of Paper”.

GRCLAS2E

Selecting A Mode To Match Your Orig-

inal

See ⇒ P.45 “Selecting A Mode To

Match Your Original”.

❖

Making Variable Numbers Of Prints

From The Same Original

See ⇒ P.56 “Manual Class Mode

With One Original—Making Vari-

able Numbers Of Prints From The

Same Original”.

❖

Saving Ink

See ⇒ P.48 “Economy Mode—Sav-

ing Ink”.

Making Master And Prints At One

Stroke

See ⇒ P.49 “Auto Cycle—Making

Master And Prints At One Stroke”.

❖

Making Variable Numbers Of Prints

From The Same Original Using All

Stored Data

GRCLAS2E

See ⇒ P.51 “All Class Mode—Mak-

ing Variable Numbers Of Prints From

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖

Making Variable Numbers Of Prints

From Different Originals

❖

Having Images Repeated On One

See ⇒ P.58 “Manual Class Mode

With 2 Or More Originals—Making

Variable Numbers Of Prints From

Different Originals”.

See ⇒ P.68 “Auto Combine Mode—

Having Images Repeated On One

Print”.

1 1

A B

C D

GRACOM0E

GRCLAS1E

See ⇒ P.70 “Skip Feed Printing”.

Skip Feed Printing

❖

Making Fixed Numbers Of Prints

From The Same Original

See ⇒ P.61 “Class Mode—Making

Fixed Numbers Of Prints From The

same Original”.

Storing Your Print Settings In Memory

See ⇒ P.72 “Program—Storing Your

Print Settings In Memory”.

❖

Printing Secret Documents

See ⇒ P.75 “Security Mode—Print-

ing Secret Documents”.

R R R

Regaining The Image Density When

The Ink On The Drum Dries

See ⇒ P.76 “Quality Start Mode—

Regaining The Image Density When

The Ink On The Drum Dries”.

R R R

GRCLAS0E

❖

Separating Printing Sets On The Pa-

per Delivery Tray

See ⇒ P.77 “Job Separation—Sepa-

rating Printing Sets On The Paper

Delivery Tray”.

❖

Combining Originals Into One Print

See ⇒ P.63 “Combine Originals—

Combining Originals Into One

Print”.

1 2

GRCOMB2E

GRJOBS0E

❖

Saving Master

See ⇒ P.79 “Saving Master”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖

On Line Printing

See ⇒ P.80 “On Line Printing”.

Combining Originals Into One Print

Having The Date Stamped On Your

Prints

See ⇒ P.115 “Stamping Date—Hav-

ing The Date Stamped On Your

Prints”.

Making Color Prints

See ⇒ P.87 “Making Color Prints”.

Printing In Two Colors

See ⇒ P.88 “Printing In Two Col-

ors”.

'98.7.25

GRDATE0E

Having Page Numbers Stamped On

Your Prints

See ⇒ P.117 “Page Stamping—Hav-

ing Page Numbers Stamped On Your

Prints”.

GRCOLO0E

❖

Rotating The Original Images

See ⇒ P.91 “Image Rotation—Rotat-

ing Original Images”.

❖

Make-up Printing

See ⇒ P.105 “Make-up Printing”.

Merging Images

See ⇒ P.113 “Image Overlay—

Merging Images”.

– 1 –

GRPAGE0E

Printing Preset Messages On Your

Prints

See ⇒ P.120 “Stamping Function—

Printing Preset Messages On Your

Prints”.

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Priority

GROVER0E

Preliminary

Confidential

GRSTAM0E

GROVER1E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖

Printing Your Own Messages On Your

Prints

See ⇒ P.122 “User Stamping—

Printing Your Own Messages On

Your Prints”.

GRUSTA0E

❖

With The Memory Board

See ⇒ P.124 “Memory Combine—

Combining Originals Into One Print

With The Memory Board”.

GRMCOM0E

GRREPE0E

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Machine Exterior........................................................................................ 1

Machine Interior......................................................................................... 2

Option s ....................................................................................................... 4

Operation Pane l ......................................................................................... 6

Keys .............................................................................................................. 6

Indicators....................................................................................................... 8

Panel Display............................................................................................. 9

Display Panel Layout .................................................................................. 10

1.OPERATION

Printing Pape r .......................................................................................... 11

Original s ................................................................................................... 13

Preparation For Printing ......................................................................... 15

Loading Paper............................................................................................. 15

Setting Up The Paper Delivery Tray ........................................................... 16

User Codes............................................................................................... 19

Standard Printing .................................................................................... 20

Loading Paper On The Paper Feed Tray ............................................... 22

Replenishing Paper..................................................................................... 22

Changing The Paper Siz e ........................................................................... 23

Closing The Paper Feed And Paper Delivery Tray s ............................. 24

Adjusting Print Image Position .............................................................. 25

Adjusting Print Image Density ............................................................... 26

Before Making A Master.............................................................................. 26

After Making A Master................................................................................. 26

Tint Mode—Halftone Printin g ................................................................. 27

Changing The Printing Speed ................................................................ 28

Stopping The Machine During A Multi-print Run ................................. 29

When You Want To Stop The Machine During A Multi-print Run And Print

A Different Original..................................................................................... 29

When You Want To Change The Number Of Prints Entered Or Check

The Completed Prints ................................................................................ 29

Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratio s .. 30

Auto Magnification Selection—Having The Machine Choose The

Reproduction Ratios .............................................................................. 32

Zoom—Reducing And Enlarging In 1 % Steps..................................... 35

Directional Magnification—Stretching And Squeezing The Image In 1 % Steps .. 37

Entering The Reproduction Ratios.............................................................. 37

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering The Dimensions Of The Original And Print Pape r ........................ 38

Edge Erase—Erasing Edge Margins...................................................... 40

Printing On Various Kinds Of Paper...................................................... 42

Printing On Thick Pape r .............................................................................. 42

Printing On Thin Paper................................................................................ 42

Printing On Envelopes ................................................................................ 43

Printing On Special Kinds Of Pape r ............................................................ 43

Selecting A Mode To Match Your Origina l ............................................ 45

Photo Mode Printing.................................................................................... 45

Letter/Photo Mode Printing ......................................................................... 46

Pencil Mode Printing ................................................................................... 47

Economy Mode—Saving Ink .................................................................. 48

Auto Cycle—Making Master And Prints At One Strok e ....................... 49

All Class Mode—Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From The

Same Original Using All Stored Data.................................................... 51

Auto Class Mode— Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From The

Same Original Using Stored Dat a ......................................................... 53

Manual Class Mode With One Original—Making Variable Numbers

Of Prints From The Same Original........................................................ 56

Manual Class Mode With 2 Or More Originals—Making Variable

Numbers Of Prints From Different Originals ....................................... 58

Class Mode—Making Fixed Numbers Of Prints From The same Original ..... 61

Combine Originals—Combining Originals Into One Print................... 63

Auto Combine Mode—Having Images Repeated On One Print .......... 68

Skip Feed Printin g ................................................................................... 70

Program—Storing Your Print Settings In Memor y ............................... 72

Storing Your Settings .................................................................................. 72

Recalling A Program ................................................................................... 73

Protecting A Progra m .................................................................................. 73

Removing Program Protection.................................................................... 74

Security Mode—Printing Secret Documents ........................................ 75

Quality Start Mode— Regaining The Image Density When The Ink

On The Drum Dries................................................................................. 76

Using Quality Start Manually....................................................................... 76

Job Separation—Separating Printing Sets On The Paper Delivery

Tray.......................................................................................................... 77

Saving Maste r .......................................................................................... 79

On Line Printing....................................................................................... 80

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2.OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Printing Using The Optional Document Feeder.................................... 81

Original s ...................................................................................................... 81

Setting Originals In The Document Feede r ................................................. 82

Combine Originals Printing With The Document Feeder ............................ 83

Manual Class Mode With 2 Or More Originals Using The Document Feeder.... 84

Color Printing Using The Optional Color Drum.................................... 87

Making Color Print s ..................................................................................... 87

Changing The Color Drum Uni t ................................................................... 87

Printing In Two Color s ................................................................................. 88

Changing The Drum Siz e ........................................................................ 90

Printing Area (at 23 °C/73 °F, 65 % RH )....................................................... 90

Master Cut Length....................................................................................... 90

Image Rotation—Rotating Original Images .......................................... 91

Make-up Printing Features ..................................................................... 93

Main Features ............................................................................................. 93

Make-up Modes For Designated Areas ...................................................... 93

Make-up Modes For Outside Designated Area s ......................................... 94

Background Patterns................................................................................... 96

Making A Command Sheet For Make-Up Printing................................ 98

Command sheet.......................................................................................... 98

How To Make A Command Sheet............................................................... 99

Command Sheets And Finished Prints ..................................................... 104

Make-up Printing ................................................................................... 105

Make-up Printing With The Optional Document Feeder .................... 107

Make-up Sample s .................................................................................. 110

Image Overlay—Merging Image s ......................................................... 113

Stamping Date—Having The Date Stamped On Your Print s ............. 115

Page Stamping—Having Page Numbers Stamped On Your Prints .. 117

Stamping Function—Printing Preset Messages On Your Prints ...... 120

User Stamping—Printing Your Own Messages On Your Prints ....... 122

Memory Combine—Combining Originals Into One Print With The

Memory Board ...................................................................................... 124

Combine 4, 8, or 16 Originals – 4, 8, or 16 One-sided Originals →

1 One-sided Print Of 4, 8, or 16 Images .................................................. 125

Repeat—Repeating An Image Over The Entire Print ............................... 129

3.USER TOOLS

Accessing The User Tools.................................................................... 133

User Tools Menu.................................................................................... 135

1. System .................................................................................................. 135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Set Operation Modes ............................................................................ 136

3. Initial Setting.......................................................................................... 137

4. Mode Settin g ......................................................................................... 139

5. Stamp.................................................................................................... 144

6. Set User Code (s) ................................................................................. 146

User Tool Menus In Detail..................................................................... 148

1-8 Time Settin g ........................................................................................ 148

3-4 Reproduction Ratio ............................................................................. 148

3-5 Class Enter No.................................................................................... 149

3-9 Margin Erase Are a .............................................................................. 150

4-11 No. of Skip Feed ............................................................................... 151

4-14 No. of Q.start..................................................................................... 152

4-19 Type of Paper ................................................................................... 154

5-4 Stamp Positio n .................................................................................... 154

5-7 Position (User) .................................................................................... 156

5-8 Regist. (User )...................................................................................... 158

5-11 Position (Date) .................................................................................. 158

5-14 Position (Page) ................................................................................. 160

5-15 Make/Chg. Patter n ............................................................................ 161

6-1 Check Counter.................................................................................... 162

6-2 Reset Counter s ................................................................................... 163

6-4 Chg. User Code .................................................................................. 163

6-5 Del. User Code ................................................................................... 164

4.What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

If Your Machine Does Not Operate As You Want ............................... 165

If You Cannot Make Prints As You Want............................................. 167

Combine Originals Mode........................................................................... 167

x Clearing Misfeeds............................................................................. 168

”x + A” Paper Misfeed In The Paper Feed Section ................................. 168

”x + A + B” Paper Misfeed In The Paper Feed Section........................... 169

”x + B” Paper Or Master Wrapped Around The Drum............................. 170

”x + C” Paper Misfeed In The Paper Exit Section ................................... 172

”x + D” Master Misfeed In The Master Feed Section .............................. 173

”x + D + B” Master Misfeed In The Master Feed Section........................ 173

”x + B + E” Master Misfeed in The Master Eject Section ........................ 174

”x + E” Master Misfeed In The Master Eject Section............................... 175

”x + P” Original Misfeed Occurs When Using The Optional Document Feeder.... 175

When The Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M ) Lights............................... 177

When The Add Ink Indicator (j ) Lights.............................................. 178

When The Master End Indicator (C ) Lights........................................ 180

When The Master Eject Indicator (k) Lights...................................... 182

When Other Indicators Are Lit.............................................................. 183

When The Prints Are Not Delivered In A Neat Stack.......................... 184

xvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Poor Printing.......................................................................................... 185

Dirty Background....................................................................................... 185

Black Line/Stain ........................................................................................ 188

Skipped Print s ........................................................................................... 188

5.REMARKS

Operation Notes..................................................................................... 189

General Cautions ...................................................................................... 189

Print Paper ................................................................................................ 191

Original s .................................................................................................... 191

Misfed Pape r ............................................................................................. 191

PC Controller............................................................................................. 192

Where To Put Your Machine................................................................. 193

Environmental Conditions ......................................................................... 193

Power connection...................................................................................... 194

Access to machin e .................................................................................... 194

Maintaining Your Machine.................................................................... 196

Main Fram e ............................................................................................... 196

Optional Document Feeder....................................................................... 197

Combination Chart ................................................................................ 198

6.SPECIFICATIONS

Main Frame............................................................................................. 201

Document Feeder .................................................................................. 205

Consumables......................................................................................... 206

INDEX...................................................................................................... 207

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This page is intentionally blank.

xviii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Machine Exterior

TPEH162E

1. Front Door

Open for access to the inside of the ma-

chine.

2. Flip-up Cover

Open to access the {Image Density } key

and so on. See ⇒ P.6 “Operation Panel”.

3. Operation Panel

Operator controls and indicators are lo-

cated here. See ⇒ P.6 “Operation Panel”.

4. Master Feed Unit

Open the master feed unit when install-

ing the master.

5. Paper Feed Tray Down key

Press to lower the paper feed tray.

6. Paper Feed Side/End Plates

Use to prevent paper skew.

7. Paper Feed Tray

Set paper on this tray for printing.

8. Paper Feed Side/End Plate Knob

Use to move the side/end plates.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Machine Interior

TPEH260E

1. Main Switch

4. Paper Delivery End Plate

Use to turn the power on or off.

This plate aligns the leading edge of

prints.

2. Paper Alignment Wing Knobs

Use to lift or lower the paper alignment

wings.

5. Paper Delivery End Plate Knob

Use to move the end plate.

3. Paper Alignment Wings

Lift or lower the wings depending on the

paper type you use.

6. Paper Delivery Tray

Completed prints are delivered here.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Paper Delivery Side Plates

These plates align the prints on the paper

delivery tray.

8. Paper Delivery Side Plate Knobs

Use to move the side plates.

9. Master Eject Unit Front Handle

Use to pull out the master eject unit.

10. Ink Holder

Set the ink cartridge in this holder.

11. Drum Unit Lock Lever B1

Lower to unlock and pull out the drum

unit.

12. Drum Unit

The master is wrapped around this unit.

13. Exposure Glass (Contact Glass)

Position originals here face down for

printing.

14. Platen Cover

Lower this cover over an original before

printing.

15. Trailing Edge Guides

Swing out these guides when you use A4,

8¹/₂" × 11"K or B5L paper.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Options

TPEH163E

1. Document Feeder

Note

❒ Other options:

• Color Drums: A3, 11" × 17" drum (red, blue, green, and brown)

• Color Drums: A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" drum (black, red, blue, green, and brown)

• Key Counter

• Cabinet

• Memory Board

• PC Controller

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This page is intentionally blank.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation Panel

Keys

4 6

User Tools

Stamp

Program

Clea

Drum

17 8¹/²Color

Image Density

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Enter

Speed

Fast

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

Combine

Class

Slow

Clear/Stop

20 21

1. {Quality Start}key

See ⇒ P.76 “Quality Start Mode— Regain-

ing The Image Density When The Ink On The

Drum Dries”.

8. {Edge Erase}key

Press to print originals that have an un-

necessary image on the edges. See ⇒ P.40

“Edge Erase—Erasing Edge Margins”.

2. {Security}key

9. {Image Density}key

See ⇒ P.75 “Security Mode—Printing Se-

Press to make prints darker or lighter.

See ⇒ P.26 “Adjusting Print Image Densi-

ty”.

cret Documents”.

3. {Skip Feed}key

10. {Tint}key

Press to select skip feed printing. See ⇒

P.70 “Skip Feed Printing”.

Press to reproduce tinted images. See ⇒

P.27 “Tint Mode—Halftone Printing”.

4. {User Tools}key

Press to change the default settings and

conditions to meet your requirements.

11. {Economy Mode }key

Press to save ink. See ⇒ P.48 “Economy

Mode—Saving Ink”.

5. {Stamp }key

12. {On Line }key

See ⇒ P.80 “On Line Printing”.

Press to select the optional Stamp func-

tion. See ⇒ P.115 “Stamping Date—Hav-

ing The Date Stamped On Your Prints”, ⇒

P.117 “Page Stamping—Having Page Num-

bers Stamped On Your Prints”, ⇒ P.120

“Stamping Function—Printing Preset Mes-

sages On Your Prints”, ⇒ P.122 “User

Stamping—Printing Your Own Messages

On Your Prints”.

13. {Job Separator}key

See ⇒ P.77 “Job Separation—Separating

Printing Sets On The Paper Delivery Tray”.

14. {Combine }key

Press to combine originals onto 1 print.

See ⇒ P.63 “Combine Originals—Combin-

ing Originals Into One Print”, ⇒ P.124

“Memory Combine—Combining Originals

Into One Print With The Memory Board”, ⇒

P.68 “Auto Combine Mode—Having Images

Repeated On One Print”.

6. {Make-Up}key

Press to use the optional Make-up func-

tion. See ⇒ P.105 “Make-up Printing”.

7. {Overlay}key

Press to select optional Image Overlay

mode. See ⇒ P.113 “Image Overlay—

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Merging Images”.

Program

Clear Modes

8¹/²Color

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Fast

Clear/Stop

20 21

TPES011N

15. {

Class

}

key

19. Number keys

Press to select All Class, A uto Class,

Manual Class, or Class mode. See ⇒ P.51

“All Class Mode—Making Variable Num-

bers Of Prints From The Same Original Us-

ing All Stored Data”, ⇒ P.53 “Auto Class

Mode— Making Variable Numbers Of

Prints From The Same Original Using

Stored Data”, ⇒ P.56 “Manual Class Mode

With One Original—Making Variable Num-

bers Of Prints From The Same Original”, ⇒

P.58 “Manual Class Mode With 2 Or More

Originals—Making Variable Numbers Of

Prints From Different Originals”, ⇒ P.61

“Class Mode—Making Fixed Numbers Of

Prints From The same Original”.

Press to enter the desired number of

prints and data for selected modes.

20. {Clear/Stop}key

While printing, press to stop the machine

op eration.

21. {Enter}key

Use to enter data in selected modes.

22. {Clear Modes}key

Press to clear the previously entered job

settings.

23. {Start}key

Press to make a master.

24. {Auto Cycle}key

16. {Speed}keys

Use to process the master and make

prints at one stroke. See ⇒ P.49 “Auto Cy-

cle—Making Master And Prints At One

Stroke”.

Press to adjust the printing speed. See ⇒

P.26 “Adjusting Print Image Density”, ⇒

P.28 “Changing The Printing Speed”.

17. {~}{}}{|}{{}keys

Press to shift the image forward, back-

ward, right, or left. See ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”.

They are also used to highlight the sec-

tion you wish to select.

25. {Proof}key

Press to make proof prints.

26. {Print}key

Press to start printing.

18. {Program}key

Press to input or recall user programs.

See ⇒ P.72 “Program—Storing Your Print

Settings In Memory”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indicators

Drum

17 8¹/²Color

Image Density

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Tint

Speed

Fast

Economy Mode

Job Separator

Combine

Class

Slow

TPES012N

1. Special Feature indicator

6. Counter

This indicator is lit when you press keys

under the flip-up cover.

Displays the number of prints entered.

While printing, it shows the number of

prints remaining.

2. Monitors

7. Panel Display

See ⇒ P.9 “Panel Display”.

The monitors light up when a non-stan-

dard condition occurs within the ma-

chine. See ⇒ P.165 “If Your Machine Does

Not Operate As You Want”.

3. A3/11" × 17" Drum indicator

This indicator is lit when the A3, 11" × 17"

drum unit is installed. See ⇒ P.90

“Changing The Drum Size”.

4. A4/8¹/₂" × 11" Drum indicator

This indicator is lit when the A4, 8¹/₂" ×

11" drum unit is installed. See ⇒ P.90

“Changing The Drum Size”.

5. Color Drum indicator

This indicator is lit when the color drum

unit is installed. See ⇒ P.87 “Color Print-

ing Using The Optional Color Drum”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Panel Display

The panel display shows operational status, error messages, and function

menus.

TPES658N

• To move the selection to the right,

1. The function items for the select-

press the [→] key.

ed function are displayed.

3. Displays operational status or

2. These keys correspond to the item

on the display.

messages.

Press a relevant key to select a function.

• To move the selection to the left, press

4. Displays items which can be se-

lected or specified.

the [←] key.

Important

❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30 N (about 3 kgf) or more to

the panel display. Otherwise, the display might be damaged.

Note

❒ When you select or specify an item on the panel display, it is highlighted,

Auto

ex.

. Keys appearing as a

cannot be used.

❒ Common keys:

[

]

Sets a selected function or entered value.

Cancel

]

Cancels a selected function or entered value and returns

to the previous display.

[

Prev.][Next

]

When there are too many items to fit on the display, use

these keys to move between pages.

{~}{}}{|}{{}[←][→]

Press to highlight the selection you wish to select.

Sets a slected value.

[

Select

Exit

]

Turns off the message panel display and returns to the

previous display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display Panel Layout

The basic elements used on the display are shown below. Understanding their

meaning helps you exploit this machine's features quickly and easily.

❖

Sample Display for Selecting the [Original] key

TPES655N

1. Operational status or message.

2. Available functions.

3. If you see a picture with a key

whitened out, it means “Press this

key”.

kPress the [Original] key.

TPES510E

1. Available functions.

2. Cancels the settings and returns

to the previous display.

3. Confirms the settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. OPERATION

Printing Paper

The following types of print paper are not recommended for this machine.

• Paper smaller than 70 mm × 148 mm, 2.8" × 5.9"

• Paper larger than 297 mm × 432 mm, 11.6" × 17.0"

• Paper heavier than 209.3 g/m², 55.6 lb

• Paper lighter than 47.1 g/m², 12.6 lb

• Roughly-cut paper

• Paper of different thickness in the same stack

• Envelopes heavier than 85 g/m², 22 lb.

• Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper

• Torn paper

• Slippery paper

• Rough paper

• Paper with any kind of coating (such as carbon)

• Short grain paper

• Thin paper that has low stiffness

• The following types of envelopes

If you make a print on rough grain paper, the copy image might be blurred.

You can use A3 (297 × 420 mm) or 11" × 17" originals or printing paper. When

you want to print the entire image of an A3, 11" × 17" original, select Reduce

mode because the maximum print areas are as follows:

• Metric version: 290 × 409 mm, 11.4" × 16.1"

• Inch version: 290 × 419 mm, 11.4" × 16.4"

When you use A3, 11" × 17" and 209.3 g/m², 55.6 lb paper, slow the printing

speed down to setting 1, 2, or 3.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Important

❒ Correct curls in the paper before setting it in the machine. When you cannot

correct the paper curl, stack the paper with the curl face down. If paper is

curled, it might wrap around the drum or stains might appear.

Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat or direct sunlight.

Store on a flat surface.

Store paper where it will not curl or absorb moisture. Use paper soon after it is

unpacked.

Only use paper where the leading edge has two right angle corners.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Originals

The following original sizes set on the exposure glass (contact glass) can be de-

tected.

Metric version

Inch version

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL

11" × 17"L , 8¹/₂" × 14"L, 8¹/₂" × 11"KL

Under the following conditions, the machine might not detect the original. In

this case, select the original image area with the {Edge Erase} key. See ⇒ P.40

“Edge Erase—Erasing Edge Margins”.

• When you use originals with index tabs.

• When you use OHP transparencies or translucent originals.

• When you use dark originals.

• When you use originals with solid images.

• When you use originals other than the sizes described above.

If you do not lift the platen cover more than 30 cm, 12" when you replace origi-

nals, the machine might not detect the original.

The maximum original size you can set on the exposure glass (contact glass) is

304.8 × 432 mm, 12" × 17".

If you use originals that have bold letters or solid images at the leading edges,

you might get prints with dirty edges. In this case, set the original face down

with the widest margin toward the paper delivery tray or raise the printing

speed.

Set the original after correction fluid and ink have completely dried. Not taking

this precaution could mark the exposure glass (contact glass) and cause marks

to be printed.

Basically, set originals as shown below.

R R

GRSETT0E

When you have an optional memory board and the original is set in a different

direction from the print paper, the machine automatically rotates the original

image by 90° to match the print paper direction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

The first 10 mm, 0.4", of the leading edge and the last 2 mm, 0.08”, of the trailing

edge cannot be printed. Make sure the leading edge margin is at least 10 mm,

0.4", and the trailing edge margin is at least 2 mm, 0.08”.

Original

a = 10 mm, 0.4"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preparation For Printing

D Place the paper on the paper feed

Loading Paper

tray.

A Carefully open the paper feed

tray.

TPEY040E

Note

TPEY998E

❒ Correct the paper curl before

setting the paper. If you cannot

do so, stack the paper with the

curl face down.

B Lift the feed side/end plates.

TPEY090E

TPEY999E

E Make sure that the paper feed

side/end plates make contact with

the paper lightly.

C Grasp the side/end plate knob

and adjust the side/end plates to

match the paper size.

TPEY050E

TPEY030E

Note

❒ Make sure that the paper size

and direction in the panel dis-

play correspond with the actual

paper size and direction set on

the paper feed tray.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

posite side of the operation

panel.

Setting Up The Paper Delivery

Tray

A Grasp the end plate knob and

move the paper delivery end plate

to match the print paper size.

When you use A4, 8¹/₂" × 11"L

or smaller paper

TPEH040N

A Adjust the end plate to match

the paper size scale on the op-

eration panel side.

B Grasp the side plate knobs and

move the paper delivery side

plates to match the print paper

size.

TPEH030N

TPEH150E

When you use B4, 8¹/₂" × 14"L

Note

or larger paper

❒ The inside of the side plates

should match the paper size.

A Pull out the paper delivery tray

until it stops.

When you use thick paper (157 g/

m²to 209.3 g/m², 42 lb to 55.6 lb)

A Adjust the side plates to match

the paper size scale on the

main frame side.

When you use standard paper

(47 g/m²to 128 g/m², 12.5 lb to

34 lb)

TPEH040E

B Adjust the end plate to match

the paper size scale on the op-

A Adjust the side plates to match

the paper size scale on the end

plate side.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preparation For Printing

C Lower or lift the paper alignment D When you use A4, 8¹/₂" × 11"K, or

wings by turning the left and

right knobs.

B5L paper, swing out the trailing

edge guides.

TPEH141E

TPEH310E

Note

When you use A4, 8 ¹/₂" ×

❒ When the guides are up, you

might not be able to load the

unit to full capacity (1,000

sheets) depending on the paper

you are using.

11"Kpaper

A Swing out the guides as shown

in the illustration.

❒ Lift the paper alignment wings

when B5L prints are curled.

When you use 81.4 g/m², 21.6 lb

or thicker paper

A Lower the paper alignment

wings.

GRTRAI0E

When you use 81.4 g/m², 21.6 lb

or thinner and B5 or smaller

paper

When you use B5L paper

A Swing out the guides as shown

in the illustration.

A Lower the paper alignment

wings.

When you use 81.4 g/m², 21.6 lb

or thinner and A4, 8¹/₂× 11" or

larger paper

A Lift the paper alignment

wings.

GRTRAI1E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

E Turn on the main switch.

TPEH021E

Note

❒ You can have the machine dis-

play how much ink and master

are left when you switch it on.

See “User Tools—Ink/Master

Left” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Codes

Preparation

B Press the {Enter}key.

You have to turn on User Code

mode and register your user code

with the user tools. You can regis-

ter up to 20 user codes. See “Set

User Code”, “Reg. User Code”, in

⇒ P.146 “6. Set User Code (s)”.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

If the machine is set to use the User

Code function, operators must input

their user codes before the machine

can be operated. The machine keeps

count of the number of copies made

under each user code. See “Set User

Code”, “Reg. User Code”, in ⇒ P.146

“6. Set User Code (s)”.

Clear/Stop

TPES020N

C Make your prints.

D To prevent others from making

prints with your user code, hold

the {Clear Modes} key, then press

the {Clear/Stop}key.

Note

❒ When the machine is set for user

codes, the machine will prompt

you for your user codes when you

turn the main switch on or when

auto reset comes into effect.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

A Input your user code (4 digits)

with the Number keys.

Clear/Stop

TPES030N

Note

❒ User codes are not displayed on

the panel display.

❒ To change the number entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Standard Printing

A Lift the platen cover.

E Enter the number of prints re-

quired with the Number keys.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPEH010E

TPES040N

Note

❒ Be sure to lift the platen cover

more than 30 cm, 12".

❒ Up to 9999 prints can be entered

at one time.

B Set the original face down on the

exposure glass (contact glass).

The original should be aligned to

the rear left corner.

❒ To change the number entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new number.

F Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

TPEH270E

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

C Lower the platen cover.

A trial print is delivered to the pa-

per delivery tray.

D Select the paper type with the

[

Ppr. Type ] key.

Reference

See ⇒ P.42 “Printing On Various

Kinds Of Paper”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard Printing

G Press the {Proof} key and check I Open the paper delivery side

the image density and the image

position of the proof print.

plate of the operation panel side.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPEH050E

TPES060N

Note

❒ You cannot open the side plate

on the opposite side.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key. See ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”.

J Remove the prints from the paper

delivery tray.

❒ If the image density is slightly

dark or light, adjust the image

density using the {Speed} keys.

See ⇒ P.26 “Adjusting Print Im-

age Density”.

H Press the {Print}key.

Program

Clear Modes

TPEH060E

Auto Cycle

Proof

Note

❒ To return the machine to the ini-

tial condition after printing,

press the {Clear Modes}key.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

K Close the paper delivery side

TPES070N

plate.

Note

❒ After printing is completed, the

same number of prints is auto-

matically set for the next job.

❒ To stop the machine during a

multi-print run, press the {Clear/

Stop}key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Loading Paper On The Paper Feed Tray

The Load Paper indicator (B) lights

C Load paper on the paper feed tray.

when the paper feed tray runs out of

paper.

Replenishing Paper

A Press the {Clear/Stop}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

TPEY040E

Proof

Note

❒ If you wish to set a different

kind of paper, select the appro-

priate paper type with the [Ppr.

Type] key. See ⇒ P.42 “Printing

On Various Kinds Of Paper”.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES080N

❒ Release the pads of the feed

side/end plates before loading

paper. Reset the pads after pa-

per is set.

Note

❒ This step is necessary only if

you want to pause a print run to

replenish paper.

❒ Correct paper curl before set-

B Press the Paper Feed Tray Down

ting the paper.

key.

D Press the {Print} key to resume

printing.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

TPEH130E

Clear/Stop

TPES070N

Note

❒ The paper feed tray will lower

without the key being pressed

when printing paper runs out.

❒ The top sheet might remain be-

tween the feed rollers. In this

case, remove the top sheet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Loading Paper On The Paper Feed Tray

❒ Make sure that the side/end

plates touch the paper lightly.

Changing The Paper Size

❒ Make sure that the paper size

and direction in the panel dis-

play correspond with the actual

paper size and direction set on

the paper feed tray.

A Remove the paper from the paper

feed tray.

❒ If you set a different kind of pa-

per, do not forget to select the

appropriate paper type with the

[

Ppr. Type] key. See ⇒ P.42

“Printing On Various Kinds Of

Paper”.

TPEY997E

D Adjust the paper delivery side

plates and if necessary, pull out or

in the paper delivery tray and ad-

just the end plate. See ⇒ P.16

“Setting Up The Paper Delivery

Tray”.

The paper feed tray will lower.

B Grasp the side/end plate knob

and adjust the paper feed side/

end plates to match the paper

size.

TPEY030E

C Place the paper on the paper feed

tray.

TPEY040E

Note

❒ Correct any paper curl before

setting the paper.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Closing The Paper Feed And Paper

Delivery Trays

A Remove the paper from the paper D Close the paper feed tray.

feed tray.

TPEY011E

TPEY997E

E Push in the paper delivery tray, if

The paper feed tray will lower.

necessary.

B Turn off the main switch.

TPEH041E

TPEH020E

C Adjust the side/end plates to

match A4L paper and lower

them.

TPEY021E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting Print Image Position

You can adjust the print image posi-

tion to suit your needs.

Note

❒ When you shift the image for-

wards, leave a 10 mm, 0.4" mar-

gin at the leading edge. If there

is no margin, paper might wrap

around the drum and cause a

misfeed.

❒ The {~}and {}}keys shift the

image up to 15 mm, 0.6" each

way and the image is shifted

about 0.5 mm, 0.02" each time

they are pressed.

GRPOSI0E

❒ The {|}and {{}keys shift the

image up to 10 mm, 0.4" each

way and the image is shifted

about 0.5 mm, 0.02" each time

they are pressed.

*…Paper feed direction

A Press the [Image =] key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Press the {Proof}key to check the

image position.

TPES560E

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Note

Proof

❒ You can skip step A and adjust

the image position directly by

pressing the {~}, {}}, {|}, and

{{}keys.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

B Adjust image position using the

TPES060N

{~}, {}}, {|}, and {{}keys.

Speed

Fast

Clear/S

TPES090N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Adjusting Print Image Density

You can adjust the print image densi-

ty to suit your needs. There are two

ways to do this:

After Making A Master

A To increase the image density,

press the {W} key. To reduce the

image density, press the {V}key.

❖

Before Making A Master

Use the {Image Density}key.

❖

After Making A Master

Use the {Speed}keys.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

Before Making A Master

A Press the {Image Density}key to ad-

just the image density.

TPES100N

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Note

❒ The faster the printing speed be-

comes, the lighter the printing

density is. If you want darker

prints, decrease the printing

speed.

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES340N

B Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tint Mode—Halftone Printing

Use this function to print tinted imag-

es.

GRTINT0E

A Press the {Tint}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES110N

B Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Changing The Printing Speed

Use the {Speed} keys to adjust the

printing speed. The relationship be-

tween printing speed and print quali-

ty depends on the type of paper you

use.

A Press the {V} key to increase the

speed and press the {W}key to re-

duce the speed.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

TPES100N

Note

❒ The following speeds are avail-

able:

• Setting 1:

60 sheets/minute

• Setting 2:

75 sheets/minute

• Setting 3:

90 sheets/minute

• Setting 4:

105 sheets/minute

• Setting 5:

120 sheets/minute

❒ The default is 90 sheets/minute.

❒ The faster the printing speed be-

comes, the lighter the printing

density is, and vice versa.

❒ When the machine is used in

low temperature conditions, the

image density might decrease.

In this case, slow the printing

speed down to setting 1 or 2.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stopping The Machine During A Multi-print Run

Stopping The Machine During A Multi-print

Run

When You Want To Stop The

Machine During A Multi-print

Run And Print A Different

Original

When You Want To Change

The Number Of Prints Entered

Or Check The Completed

Prints

A Press the {Clear/Stop}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES080N

B Set the new original.

B Change the number of prints or

check the completed prints.

C Enter the number of prints and

Note

press the {Start}key.

❒ When you change the number

of prints, you can re-enter the

number with the Number keys

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

after pressing the {Clear/Stop

}

key.

Enter

Start

C Press the {Print}key.

Clear/Stop

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

TPES050N

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES070N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing And

Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

You can select a preset ratio for print-

ing.

❒ You can change the fixed repro-

duction ratio with the user tools.

See “Reproduction Ratio” in ⇒

P.148 “3-4 Reproduction Ratio”.

❒ Prints can be reduced or enlarged

as follows:

❖

Metric version

Ratio (%) Original → Print paper

size

GRRATI0E

141

A4 → A3, A5 → A4, B5 →

B4, B6 → B5

Note

❒ The leading edge of the print im-

age does not shift when a print im-

age is made with this function.

122

115

A4 → B4, A5 → B5

B4 → A3, B5 → A4, B6 → A5

A3 → B4, A4 → B5

B4 → A4, B5 → A5

A3 → A4, A4 → A5, B4 →

❖

Inch version

Ratio (%) Original → Print paper

size

5 ¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂" → 8 ¹/₂" × 14"

155

8 ¹/₂" × 11" → 11" × 17", 5 ¹/

₂" × 8 ¹/₂" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11"

129

GRRATI1E

*…Paper feed direction

a=10 mm, 0.4"

8 ¹/₂" × 14" → 11" × 17"

121

❒ You can select one of 7 preset ratios

(3 enlargement ratios, 4 reduction

ratios).

8 ¹/₂" × 14" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11"

11" × 15" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11"

❒ You can select a ratio regardless of

the size of an original or printing

paper. With some ratios, parts of

the image might not be printed or

margins will appear on prints.

11" × 17" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11", 8 ¹/

₂" × 11" → 5 ¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

A Press the [Ratio] key.

H Make your prints.

TPES570E

B Select the desired ratio with the

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

C Press the [OK] key.

D Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

E Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

F Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

G Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

Note

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Auto Magnification Selection—Having The

Machine Choose The Reproduction Ratios

The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the paper

and original sizes you use.

GRAUTO0E

Note

❒ You can change the reproduction ratio from 50 % to 200 % when you set an

original on the exposure glass (contact glass).

❒ You can change the reproduction ratio from 50 % to 155 % when you set an

originals in the optional document feeder.

❒ The paper and the original sizes that can be used in this function and the re-

production ratio selected depending on the original and paper sizes are as fol-

lows:

❖

Metric version

A5L ^*2A5K ^*2

Origi- A3L

B4L

A4L

A4K

B5L

B5K

nal

Paper

A3L

B4L

A4L

A4K

100 %

87 %

71 %

115 %

100 %

82 %

141 %

122 %

100 %

163 %

141 %

115 %

100 % ^*1

100 %

115 % ^*1

115 %

141 % ^*1

141 %

71 % ^*182 % ^*1100 % ^*1

115 % ^*1

100 %

141 % ^*1

122 %

87 % ^*1

87 %

100 % ^*1

100 %

122 % ^*1

122 %

B5L

B5K

A5L

B6L

61 %

71 %

87 %

61 % ^*171 % ^*187 % ^*1

100 % ^*1

82 %

122 % ^*1

100 %

87 %

71 % ^*1

61 % ^*1

82 % ^*1

71 % ^*1

100 % ^*1

87 % ^*1

50 %

71 %

61 %

71 %

When your machine is equipped with the optional memory board, the machine

automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper direction and

selects the proper reproduction ratio. See ⇒ P.91 “Image Rotation—Rotating Origi-

nal Images”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Magnification Selection—Having The Machine Choose The Reproduction Ratios

Set these originals in the optional document feeder.

Inch version

❖

8¹/₂" × 14"L 8¹/₂" × 11"L 8¹/₂" × 11"K 8¹/₂"×5¹/₂"L 8¹/₂× 5¹/₂" K

Original 11" × 17"L

Paper

11" × 17"L

100 %

121 %

100 %

77 %

129 %

200 %

155 %

129 %

8¹/₂" × 14"L 77 %

8¹/₂" × 11"L 65 %

100 %

100 % ^*1

100 %

129 % ^*1

129 %

8¹/₂" × 11"K

65 % ^*1

77 % ^*1

61%

100 % ^*1

65 %

129 % ^*1

100 %

8¹/₂" × 5¹/₂" 50 %

65 % ^*1

100 % ^*1

When your machine is equipped with the optional memory board, the machine

automatically rotates the original image by 90 ° to match the paper direction and

selects the proper reproduction ratio. See ⇒ P.91 “Image Rotation—Rotating Origi-

nal Images”.

Set these originals in the optional document feeder.

❒ Depending on the original type you use, the proper reproduction ratio might

not be selected. See ⇒ P.13 “Originals” and ⇒ P.81 “Originals”.

A Set your original on the exposure glass (contact glass) or in the optional

document feeder.

B Press the [Ratio] key.

TPES570E

C Select [Auto] with the [→] or {}}key.

TPES570E

D Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

E Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

F Check the image position of the trial or proof print.

Note

❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] keys (See

⇒ P.25 “Adjusting Print Image Position”).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zoom—Reducing And Enlarging In 1 % Steps

Zoom—Reducing And Enlarging In 1 %

Steps

You can change the reproduction ra-

B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}

tio in 1 % steps.

key.

TPES570E

GRZOOM0E

C Press the [OK] key.

Note

D Make sure that [Zoom] is selected.

❒ You can change the reproduction

ratio from 50 % to 200 % when you

set an original on the exposure

glass (contact glass).

❒ You can change the reproduction

ratio from 50 % to 155 % when you

E Press the [OK] key.

set originals in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

F Enter the desired reproduction ra-

tio.

A Press the [Ratio] key.

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

Using the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key

TPES570E

A Adjust the ratio with the [←],

Note

[→], {~}, or {}}key.

❒ To select a custom ratio, select

the closest ratio with the [←],

[→], {~}, or {}} key. Then

press the {|}or {{}key and go

to step F.

TPES530E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

K Check the image position of the

Using the number keys

trial or proof print.

A Enter the ratio with the Num-

ber keys.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

L Make your prints.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES040N

B Press the {Enter}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES020N

G Press the [OK] key.

H Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

I Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

J Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Directional Magnification—Stretching And Squeezing The Image In 1 % Steps

DirectionalMagnification—StretchingAnd

Squeezing The Image In 1 % Steps

Prints can be reduced or enlarged at

different reproduction ratios horizon-

Entering The Reproduction

Ratios

tally and vertically. There are two

ways to use this feature:

A Press the [Ratio] key.

❖

Enter The Reproduction Ratios

Adjust the reproduction ratio man-

ually.

❖

Enter The Dimensions Of The Original

And Print Paper

Have the machine automatically

selects the proper reproduction ra-

tio.

TPES570E

B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}

key.

GRDIRE0E

TPES570E

Note

C Press the [OK] key.

❒ You can change the reproduction

ratio from 50 % to 200 % when you

set an original on the exposure

glass (contact glass).

D Select [Direct. Mag. (%)] with the

[→] or {}}key.

❒ You can change the reproduction

ratio from 50 % to 155 % when you

set originals in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

TPES570E

E Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

F Enter the vertical and horizontal J Press the {Start}key.

ratio.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Note

Clear/Stop

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

TPES050N

K Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

Adjusting ratios with the [←],

[→], {~}, or {}}key

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

A Adjust the vertical ratio with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

B Press the {{}key.

C Adjust the horizontal ratio

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

L Make your prints.

Entering The Dimensions Of

The Original And Print Paper

Entering the ratios with the

number keys

A Press the [Ratio] key.

A Enter the vertical ratio with the

Number keys.

B Press the {Enter}key.

C Enter the horizontal ratio with

the Number keys.

D Press the {Enter}key.

TPES570E

G Press the [OK] key.

H Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}

key.

I Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

TPES570E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Directional Magnification—Stretching And Squeezing The Image In 1 % Steps

The machine will select proper re-

production ratios for vertical and

horizontal directions.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select [Direct. Mag. (size)] with the

[→] or {}}key.

K Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

L Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

TPES570E

M Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

E Press the [OK] key.

Auto Cycle

F Enter the vertical original size

with the Number keys and press

the {Enter}key.

Proof

Enter

Start

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Clear/Stop

Proof

TPES050N

N Check the image position of the

Enter

Start

trial or proof print.

Clear/Stop

TPES120N

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

O Make your prints.

❒ Up to 999 mm, 99.9" can be en-

tered.

G Enter the vertical print size with

the Number keys and press the

{

Enter}key.

H Enter the horizontal original size

with the Number keys and press

the {Enter}key.

I Enter the horizontal print size

with the Number keys.

J Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Edge Erase—Erasing Edge Margins

This function erases all four sides of

B Enter the number of prints re-

the original image.

quired with the Number keys.

❖

Using Edge Erase mode

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

GRERAS0E

TPES040N

❖

When not using Edge Erase mode

When printing from thick books,

or similar originals, the binding

margin at the center and the edges

might appear on prints. The ma-

chine erases these margins auto-

matically. If you do not use Edge

Erase mode using the following

kind of originals, the images to be

printed might be also erased.

C Press the {Edge Erase}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES130N

D Select the original size and direc-

tion you use with the [←], [→],

{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}key.

GRERAS1E

Note

❒ You can adjust the erased margins

with the user tools. The default is 2

mm, 0.1”. See ⇒ P.150 “3-9 Margin

Erase Area”.

TPES530E

A Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

E Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Edge Erase—Erasing Edge Margins

F Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

G Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

To use this function, you have to

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

H Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Printing On Various Kinds Of Paper

Note

Printing On Thick Paper

❒ If necessary, lower the paper

alignment wings. See ⇒ P.15

When you make prints on thick (157

to 209.3 g/m², 42 to 55.6 lb) paper,

perform the following steps.

“Preparation For Printing”.

Printing On Thin Paper

A Press the [Ppr. Type] key.

When you make prints on thin (47.1

g/m², 12.5 lb) paper , perform the fol-

lowing steps.

A Press the [Ppr. Type] key.

TPES520E

B Select [Thick] with the [→] or {}}

key.

TPES520E

B Make sure that [Std.] is selected.

TPES570E

C Press the [OK] key.

D Adjust the paper delivery side

plates to match the paper size

scale on the main frame side.

D Adjust the paper delivery side

plates to match the paper size

scale on the end plate side.

TPEH150E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing On Various Kinds Of Paper

Note

❒ If necessary, lower or lift the pa-

per alignment wings. See ⇒

P.15 “Preparation For Printing”.

E Set the side pads (move the side

pad levers to as shown).

GRENVE0E

*: Paper feed direction

Note

❒ When you use envelopes, the

paper feed tray capacity is

about 150 sheets (85 g/m², 22 lb)

or less than 105 mm, 4.1".

TPEY060E

E If your envelopes do not feed in

well, lift the paper feed tray a lit-

tle and bring it down so that it

slants up slightly.

Printing On Envelopes

A Press the [Ppr. Type] key.

TPES520E

TPEY991

B Select [Special] with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

Printing On Special Kinds Of

Paper

Preparation

[

User 1] or [User 2] with the user

TPES530E

tools. See “Paper Type (User)” in

⇒ P.137 “3. Initial Setting”.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Place the envelopes on the paper

feed tray as shown in the illustra-

tion.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

B Select one of the paper types with

A Press the [Ppr. Type] key.

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES520E

TPES530E

B Select [User 1] or [User 2] with the

C Press the [Select] key.

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

D Select the paper misfeed condition

with the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}

key.

TPES530E

E Press the [OK] key.

If the paper misfeeds occur frequent-

ly in the paper exit section even if you

use standard or thin paper and select

the [Std.], do the following:

C Press the [OK] key.

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

A Set the wing guide to the “Down”

position with the user tools. See

“Deflector Angle” in ⇒ P.139 “4.

Mode Setting”.

If paper misfeeds occur frequently

even if you select the proper paper

type, follow the steps below.

When A4 – B5, 8¹/₂" × 11" thick paper

is not delivered properly to the paper

delivery tray, do the following:

A Press the [Ppr. Type] key.

A Set the wing guide to the “Up” po-

sition with the user tools. See “De-

flector Angle” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode

Setting”.

TPES520E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting A Mode To Match Your Original

Select one of the following four

B Select [Photo] with the [→] or {}}

modes to match your originals:

key.

❖

Photo mode

Delicate tones of photographs and

pictures can be reproduced with

this mode.

Letter mode

Select this mode when your origi-

nals contain only letters (no pic-

tures).

TPES570E

C Press the [OK] key.

Letter/Photo mode

D Adjust the screen image with the

Select this mode when your origi-

nals contain photographs or pic-

tures with letters.

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

Pencil mode

Select this mode when your origi-

nals are written in pencil.

Note

TPES530E

❒ When using Photo mode to print

originals with both text and photo-

graphs, the text will appear lighter.

To avoid this, select Letter/Photo

mode. Alternatively, use the op-

tional Make-up function to specify

Letter mode for text areas and Pho-

to mode for photograph areas.

Note

❒ Four coarseness settings are

available:

• Setting 4: coarsest

• Setting 3: coarser than setting

• Setting 2: coarser than setting

Photo Mode Printing

• Setting 1: coarser than the

standard setting

A Press the [Original] key.

E Press the [OK] key.

TPES550E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

F Adjust the lightness with the [←],

Letter/Photo Mode Printing

[→], {~}, or {}}key.

A Press the [Original] key.

TPES530E

TPES550E

G Press the [OK] key.

H Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

B Select [Letter/Photo] with the [→]

or {}}key.

I Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

TPES570E

Enter

Start

C Press the [OK] key.

Clear/Stop

D Adjust the lightness with the [←],

TPES050N

[→], {~}, or {}}key.

J Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

TPES530E

E Press the [OK] key.

K Make your prints.

F Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting A Mode To Match Your Original

G Press the {Start}key.

B Select [Pencil] with the [←] or {~}

key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES550E

TPES050N

C Press the [OK] key.

H Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

D Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass).

E Press the {Start}key.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

I Make your prints.

Enter

Start

Pencil Mode Printing

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

Note

❒ Originals written in pencil should

be set on the exposure glass (con-

tact glass).

F Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

A Press the [Original] key.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

G Make your prints.

TPES550E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Economy Mode—Saving Ink

When you want to save ink, select

Economy mode.

Note

❒ Prints will be lighter in this mode.

A Press the {Economy Mode}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES140N

B Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

C Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

D Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

E Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Cycle—Making Master And Prints At One Stroke

Auto Cycle—Making Master And Prints At

One Stroke

Use the {Auto Cycle} key to process

D Check the image position of the

masters and make prints at one

trial or proof print.

stroke.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

❒ When you use the optional docu-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

ment feeder, it is not necessary to

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

place originals one by one. All

originals are fed and prints are

completed after you press the

E Press the {Auto Cycle}key.

{

Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

A Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

Proof

Note

Enter

Start

❒ You can set up to 30 originals

into the optional document

feeder.

Clear/Stop

TPES150N

B Enter the number of prints re-

Note

❒ If you press the {Auto Cycle

quired with the Number keys.

}

key, you cannot make proof

Program

Clear Modes

prints by pressing the {Proof

key.

}

Auto Cycle

Proof

F Press the {Print}key.

Enter

Program

Clear Modes

Start

Auto Cycle

Clear/Stop

Proof

TPES040N

C Press the {Start}key.

Enter

Start

Program

Clear Modes

Clear/Stop

Auto Cycle

TPES070N

Proof

Note

❒ Repeat steps A through C until

all originals are printed when

you are setting originals on the

exposure glass (contact glass).

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

❒ If you set original in the option-

al document feeder, originals

are fed and prints are complet-

ed automatically.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All Class Mode—Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From The Same Original Using All Stored Data

All Class Mode—Making Variable

Numbers Of Prints From The Same Original

Using All Stored Data

the each set delivered to the paper

Note

You have to store the number of

students in each class with the user

tools. See ⇒ P.149 “3-5 Class Enter

No.”.

❒ When you set All Class mode, Job

Separation mode is automatically

turned on. If you use Job Separa-

tion mode with this function, the

job separator pulls the top sheet of

delivery tray. This marks the end

of each printing set. The next cycle

begins automatically. See ⇒ P.77

“Job Separation—Separating Print-

ing Sets On The Paper Delivery Tray”

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from the same original. All the

stored numbers of prints are made for

each set.

This feature is useful for teachers who

frequently make multiple print sets

for all the classes. Ex. notes, handouts,

test etc.

❒ You can cancel Job Separation

mode in All Class mode with the

user tools (see “Auto Separate” in

⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”).

Using a standard print function, the

teacher would have to stand by the

machine entering the number of

prints and pressing the {Print}key for

each class. However, All Class mode

allows you to store the number of stu-

dents in each class into the machine

memory beforehand with the user

tools. Then, whenever you need to

make print sets for all the classes, set

your original, select [All] and press the

A Press the {Class}key.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

{

Start} key. Print sets will be made

containing the correct number of

prints for each class.

TPES160N

B Make sure that the [All] is select-

ed.

C Press the [OK] key.

GRCLAS2E

D Set one original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

E Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

F Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

G Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Class Mode— Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From The Same Original Using Stored Data

Auto Class Mode— Making Variable

Numbers Of Prints From The Same Original

Using Stored Data

sheet of the each set delivered to

Note

You have to store the number of

students in each class with the user

tools. See ⇒ P.149 “3-5 Class Enter

No.”.

❒ When you set Auto Class mode,

Job Separation mode is automati-

cally turned on. If you use Job Sep-

aration mode with this function,

the job separator pulls the top

the paper delivery tray. This marks

the end of each printing set. The

next cycle begins automatically.

See ⇒ P.77 “Job Separation—Sepa-

rating Printing Sets On The Paper

Delivery Tray”.

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from the same original. The

stored numbers of prints are made for

each set.

This feature is useful for teachers who

frequently make multiple print sets

for their classes, ex. notes, handouts,

tests etc.

❒ You can cancel Job Separation

mode in Auto Class mode with the

user tools (see “Auto Separate” in

⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”).

Using a standard print function, the

teacher would have to stand by the

machine entering the number of

prints and pressing the {Print}key for

each class. However, Auto Class

mode allows you to store the number

of students in each class into the ma-

chine memory beforehand with the

user tools. Then, whenever you need

to make print sets for several classes,

set your original, select the classes

A Press the {Class}key.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

who need prints and press the {Start

}

key. Print sets will be made contain-

ing the correct number of prints for

each class.

TPES160N

B Select [by-class] with the [→] or

{}}key.

GRCLAS2E

TPES570E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

E Press the [Select] key.

C Press the [OK] key.

Note

D Select the desired classes for each

❒ Repeat steps C to E until

you have finished designat-

ing all the desired classes.

grade.

Selecting classes with the

number keys

Selecting classes with the {~},

A Enter the desired number of

grade and class with the Num-

ber keys.

{}}, {|}, or {{}key

A Select the desired class for the

Program

Clear Modes

1^stgrade with the {}}key.

Auto Cycle

You will find the number of stu-

dents is displayed on the

counter.

Proof

Enter

Start

Note

❒ When you want to select all

Clear/Stop

the classes, select [ALL].

TPES040N

B Press the [Select] key.

Note

❒ For example, to select grade 2

❒ Repeat steps A and B until

you have finished designat-

ing classes for the 1st grade.

class 4, enter 24.

❒ When you want to select all

the classes for one grade, en-

ter the grade number fol-

lowed by 0.

❒ When you want to cancel a

class, select that class with

the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}

B Press the {Enter}key.

key and press the [Cancel

key.

]

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

❒ When you want to select

many classes for one grade,

first select [ALL] and press the

Proof

[

Select] key then deselect the

Enter

unnecessary classes with the

Start

[

Cancel] key.

Clear/Stop

C Press the {{}key.

TPES020N

Now, you can select classes for

the 2^ndgrade.

Note

D Select the desired class for the

2^ndgrade with the {~}, {}}

,{|}, or {{}key.

When you want to cancel a

class, select that class with

the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}

❒

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Class Mode— Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From The Same Original Using Stored Data

key and press the [Cancel

key.

]

❒ Repeat steps A and B until

you have finished selecting

all the desired classes.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Set one original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

G Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

H Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

the paper delivery tray. This marks

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

I Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Manual Class Mode With One Original—

Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From

The Same Original

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

A Press the {Class}key.

prints from the same original. Vari-

ous numbers of prints are made for

each set.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

TPES160N

B Select [Manual] with the [→] or {}}

GRCLAS2E

key.

Note

❒ When you set Manual Class mode,

Job Separation mode is automati-

cally turned on. If you use Job Sep-

aration mode with this function,

the job separator pulls the top

sheet of the each set delivered to

the end of each printing set. The

next cycle begins automatically.

See ⇒ P.77 “Job Separation—Sepa-

rating Printing Sets On The Paper

Delivery Tray”.

TPES570E

C Press the [OK] key.

D Enter the desired number of

prints for the first set with the

Number keys.

❒ You can cancel Job Separation

mode in Manual Class mode with

the user tools (see “Auto Separate”

in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual Class Mode With One Original—Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From The Same Original

E Press the {Enter}key.

J Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

TPES020N

K Check the image position of the

F Enter the desired number of

prints for the second set with the

Number keys.

trial or proof print.

Prints From Different Originals

Program

Clear Modes

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”.)

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

L Make your prints.

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES040N

G Press the {Enter}key.

Note

❒ Repeat steps F and G for each

set.

❒ The maximum number of sets

that can be made is 20.

H Press the [OK] key.

I Set one original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Manual Class Mode With 2 Or More

Originals—Making Variable Numbers Of

and make prints of all of them at

Preparation

once. See ⇒ P.84 “Manual Class

To use this function, you have to

Mode With 2 Or More Originals Us-

ing The Document Feeder”.

select “by each original” with the

“Class Manual Set” user tool. See

“Class Manual Set” in ⇒ P.139 “4.

A Press the {Class}key.

Mode Setting”.

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from the different originals.

Various numbers of prints are made

for each set.

Speed

Slow

Combine

Class

Fast

A B

C D

TPES160N

B Select [Manual] with the [→] or {}}

key.

GRCLAS1E

Note

❒ When you set Manual Class mode,

Job Separation mode is automati-

cally turned on. If you use Job Sep-

aration mode with this function,

the job separator pulls the top

sheet of the each set delivered to

the paper delivery tray. This marks

the end of each printing set. The

next cycle begins automatically.

See ⇒ P.77 “Job Separation—Sepa-

rating Printing Sets On The Paper

Delivery Tray”.

TPES570E

C Press the [OK] key.

D Enter the desired number of

prints for the first original with

the Number keys.

❒ You can cancel Job Separation

mode in Manual Class mode with

the user tools (see “Auto Separate”

in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”).

❒ With the optional document feed-

er, you can set several originals

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual Class Mode With 2 Or More Originals—Making Variable Numbers Of Prints From Different Originals

E Press the {Enter}key.

J Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

TPES020N

K Check the image position of the

F Enter the desired number of

prints for the second original

with the Number keys.

trial or proof print.

the each set delivered to the paper

Program

Clear Modes

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] keys (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

L Press the {Auto Cycle}key.

Start

Program

Clear Modes

Clear/Stop

Auto Cycle

TPES040N

Proof

G Press the {Enter}key.

Enter

Note

Start

❒ Repeat steps F and G for each

Clear/Stop

original.

TPES150N

❒ The number of prints for up to

20 originals can be stored.

Note

❒ If you press the {Auto Cycle

key, you cannot make proof

}

H Press the [OK] key.

prints by pressing the {Proof

key.

}

I Set the first original face down on

the exposure glass (contact glass).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

M Press the {Print}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES070N

N After the first set is completed, set

the second original on the expo-

sure glass (contact glass) and

press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

Note

❒ Repeat step N until you have

finished printing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class Mode—Making Fixed Numbers Of Prints From The same Original

Class Mode—Making Fixed Numbers Of

Prints From The same Original

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

B Select [Same-NO.] with the [←] or

prints from the same original. The

{~}key.

same numbers of prints are made for

each set.

R R R

TPES550E

R R R

C Press the [OK] key.

GRCLAS0E

D With the Number keys, enter the

desired number of prints for each

set .

Note

❒ When you set Class mode, Job Sep-

aration mode is automatically

turned on. If you use Job Separa-

tion mode with this function, the

job separator pulls the top sheet of

E Press the {Enter}key.

delivery tray. This marks the end

of each printing set. The next cycle

Program

Clear Modes

begins automatically. See ⇒ P.77

“Job Separation—Separating Print-

ing Sets On The Paper Delivery

Tray”.

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

❒ You can cancel Job Separation

mode in Class mode with the user

tools. See “Auto Separate” in ⇒

P.139 “4. Mode Setting”.

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES020N

A Press the {Class}key.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

TPES160N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

F With the Number keys, enter the K Make your prints.

number of sets you wish to make.

Program

Clear Modes

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES070N

TPES040N

Note

❒ Up to 99 sets can be selected for

an original.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Set one original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

I Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

J Check the image position is the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key. See ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combine Originals—Combining Originals Into One Print

Combine Originals—Combining Originals

Into One Print

You can combine originals in two ways:

1 2

GRCOMB2E

❖

2 One-sided Originals

Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with the two

images placed side-by-side.

→

1 One-sided Print Of 2 Images

2 One-sided Originals

Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with each im-

age duplicated (total of four images).

→

1 One-sided Print Of 4 Images

Note

❒ If your machine has the optional memory board, you can also use Memory

Combine mode. See ⇒ P.124 “Memory Combine—Combining Originals Into One

Print With The Memory Board”.

❒ You can set the machine to cancel Combine Originals mode after finishing

your print job with the user tools. See “Cancel Comb.” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode

Setting”.

❒ Any image closer than 10 mm, 0.4" to the leading edge of the first original will

not be printed. Also, any image closer than 4 mm, 0.16" to the leading edge of

the second original will not be printed. When the image is too close to the

leading edge, use copies of the originals with the image shifted at least 10 mm,

0.4" for the first original (4 mm, 0.16" for the second original) from the leading

edge.

❒ You can select different kinds of image settings for the first and second orig-

inal.

❒ Make sure that the paper feed side/end plates touch the paper lightly and the

paper size and direction in the panel display correspond with the actual pa-

per size and direction set on the paper feed tray. Otherwise, the two original

images will not appear at the proper position on the prints.

❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used in 2 one-sided

originals → 1 one-sided print of 2 images mode:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

❖

Metric version

Original Size

A4K

100 %

87 %

71 %

61 %

50 %

B5K

A5K

141 %

122 %

100 %

87 %

B6K

A6K

200 %

173 %

141 %

122 %

100 %

Paper Size A3L

115 %

100 %

82 %

71 %

58 %

163 %

141 %

115 %

100 %

82 %

B4L

A4L

B5L

A5L

71 %

❖

Inch version

Original Size

8¹/₂" × 11"K

100 %

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K

129 %

Paper Size

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

77 %

100 %

65 %

50 %

100 %

65 %

❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used in 2 one-sided

originals → 1 one-sided print of 4 images mode:

❖

Metric version

Original Size

A3L

B4L

A4L

71 %

61 %

50 %

B5L

82 %

71 %

58 %

50 %

A5L

100 %

87 %

71 %

61 %

50 %

B6L

115 %

100 %

82 %

71 %

58 %

A6L

141 %

122 %

100 %

87 %

Paper

Size

A3L

B4L

A4L

B5L

A5L

50 %

58 %

50 %

71 %

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combine Originals—Combining Originals Into One Print

❖

Inch version

Original Size

8¹/₂" ×

5¹/₂" × 8¹/

11" × 17"L

14"L

11"L

₂"L

Paper Size

11" × 17"L

50 %

65 %

50 %

65 %

50 %

100 %

77 %

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

50 %

77 %

50 %

❒ If the proper reproduction ratio is not selected, images might not completely

appear on prints.

Reference

When you use the optional document feeder with this function, see ⇒ P.83

“Combine Originals Printing With The Document Feeder”.

A Set the first original face down.

TPEH270E

Note

❒ When you set original sideways (K), the top should be toward the opera-

tion panel as shown above.

B Enter the number of prints using the Number keys.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES040N

C Check the print paper size and the reproduction ratio.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Note

❒ To have the machine choose a suitable ratio automatically, use Auto Mag-

nification Selection mode. See ⇒ P.32 “Auto Magnification Selection—Hav-

ing The Machine Choose The Reproduction Ratios”.

D Press the {Combine}key.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

TPES170N

E Select [combine 2] or [Quadruple] with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combine Originals—Combining Originals Into One Print

H The beeper sounds after the first original has been stored. Set the second

original face down.

TPEH270E

I Press the {Start}key.

J Check the image position of the trial or proof print.

Note

❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] key (see ⇒

P.25 “Adjusting Print Image Position”).

K Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Auto Combine Mode—Having Images

Repeated On One Print

Auto Magnification Selection

B Enter the number of prints using

the Number keys.

To use this function, you have to

select Auto Combine mode with

the user tools. See “Combine” in ⇒

P.139 “4. Mode Setting”.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

You can have images repeated in two

ways:

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

1 1

TPES040N

C Check the print paper size and the

reproduction ratio.

Note

GRACOM0E

❒ To have the machine choose a

suitable ratio automatically, use

mode. See ⇒ P.32 “Auto Magni-

fication Selection—Having The

Machine Choose The Reproduction

Ratios”.

❖

1 One-sided Originals

Print Of 2 Images

The original image is duplicated

twice on one print.

→

1 One-sided

1 One-sided Originals

Print Of 4 Images

The original image is duplicated

four times on one print.

→

1 One-sided

D Press the {Combine}key.

Reference

Speed

Slow

See ⇒ P.63 “Combine Originals—

Combining Originals Into One Print”

for details.

Combine

Class

Fast

A Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

TPES170N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Combine Mode—Having Images Repeated On One Print

E Select [Repeat 2] or [Repeat 4] with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

H Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key. (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”.)

I Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Skip Feed Printing

If the backs of prints are dirty, you

can increase the time between two

prints using the {Skip Feed} key. By

default, when one sheet of paper is

fed the drum rotates once. However,

you can select the number of rotations

of the drum. This gives you the

chance to remove prints one by one

from the paper delivery tray or insert

one sheet of paper between two

prints. If you use this function, you

can also use paper longer than 432

mm, 17.0" in spite of the maximum

length limitations of paper.

B Press the {Skip Feed}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Make-Up

Darker 2

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES180N

C If necessary, select the number of

rotations of the drum while one

sheet of paper is fed with the [←],

[→], {~}, or {}}key.

Note

❒ Two rotations while one sheet of

paper is fed is selected as a default.

You can change this default setting

with the user tools. See “No. of

Skip Feed” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

❒ The maximum length of paper in

TPES530E

Skip Feed mode is 460 mm, 18.1".

❒ When you use paper longer than

432 mm, 17.0", completed prints

will not be delivered to the paper

delivery tray properly, so lower

the end plate and receive complet-

ed prints by hand.

Note

❒ You can also select the number

of rotations with the Number

keys.

❒ You can select from 2 to 9 rota-

tions.

A Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

By default, the machine asks

you to confirm the number of

rotations. You can have this step

omitted by adjusting the user

tool settings. See “No. of Skip

Feed” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

❒

D Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Skip Feed Printing

E Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

F Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

Auto Magnification Selection

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

G Make your prints.

Note

❒ After printing is completed, the

Skip Feed setting returns to the

default.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Program—Storing Your Print Settings In

Memory

You can store up to 9 frequently used

print job settings in machine memory

❒ The program numbers (1 to 9)

and recall them for future use.

Note

will be displayed in the panel

display.

Note

❒ The stored programs are not

cleared when you turn off the main

switch.

❒ If a user program has been pro-

tected, that program number

will not appear in the display.

To change a protected user pro-

gram, see ⇒ P.73 “Protecting A

Program”.

❒ The stored programs cannot be de-

leted. If you want to change a

stored program, overwrite it.

❒ If all the user programs have

been protected, you cannot

store any settings. Press the

Storing Your Settings

[

Cancel] key.

A Set the print settings you want to

E Select the program number you

want to store the settings in with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

put into memory.

B Press the {Program}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

TPES530E

Clear/Stop

TPES190N

Note

❒ You can also select the program

C Select [Store] with the [→] or {}}

number with the Number keys.

key.

F Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ If this program number is al-

ready used, the machine asks

whether you wish to overwrite

it or not. Press the [Yes] or [No

]

TPES570E

key.

D Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Program—Storing Your Print Settings In Memory

G Press the {Start}key.

Recalling A Program

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

A Press the {Program}key.

Proof

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Enter

Proof

Start

Clear/Stop

Enter

TPES050N

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES190N

Protecting A Program

B Make sure that [Recall] is selected.

If you want to prevent someone from

writing over your program, do the

following procedure.

A Press the {Program}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

C Press the [OK] key.

Proof

Note

❒ Programs that have been stored

beforehand are represented by a

number.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

D Select the program number you

want to recall with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

TPES190N

B Select [Protect] with the [←] or {~}

key.

TPES530E

TPES550E

Note

❒ You can also select the program

C Press the [OK] key.

number with the Number keys.

Note

E Press the [OK] key.

❒ Already protected program

numbers are shown with a

black background (e.g.A).

F Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Note

D Select the program number you

want to protect with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

❒ Already protected program

numbers are shown with a

black background (e.g.A).

D Select the program number you

want to remove protection from

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

TPES530E

Note

❒ You can also select the program

number with the Number keys.

TPES530E

E Press the [Select] key.

F Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ You can also select the program

number with the Number keys.

Removing Program Protection

E Press the [Cancel] key.

A Press the {Program}key.

F Press the [OK] key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES190N

B Select [Protect] with the [←] or {~}

key.

TPES550E

C Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security Mode—Printing Secret Documents

Security Mode—Printing Secret

Documents

This function prevents others from

making prints of secret documents

from the master. For example, if you

want to print some documents with

sensitive information, use this func-

tion after making your prints so that

nobody can access that master again.

❒ You cannot pull out the drum

unit before making the next

master.

A Make your prints.

B Press the {Security}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES200N

C Press the [Yes] key.

TPES560E

Note

❒ If you press the {Proof} key or

the {Print} key after finishing

one print job, the machine lets

you know that you cannot make

prints. Press the [Exit] key.

❒ You cannot cancel Security

mode even if you turn off the

main switch.

❒ If you make the next master, Se-

curity mode is canceled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

Quality Start Mode— Regaining The

Image Density When The Ink On The Drum

Dries

If the machine is not used for a long

period of time or you change the color

Using Quality Start Manually

drum unit, the ink on the drum might

dry causing print quality to deterio-

A Press the {Quality Start}key.

rate. To solve this problem, you can

have the machine carry out a few idle

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

spins of the drum before a print run.

This will restore image quality and

save you having to make a repeat

print run.

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

You can use this feature in two ways:

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

❖

Manual Quality Start

Choose Quality Start for the next

print run manually using the

TPES210N

B Set your original on the exposure

glass (contact glass) or in the op-

tional document feeder.

{

Quality Start}key.

❖

Auto Quality Start

Have the machine check automati-

cally how long ago the machine

was used before each print run. If

the machine has not been used for

a long time, Quality Start will be

used for the print job. By default,

Auto Quality Start mode is on. You

can turn it off with the user tools.

See “Setting Q. start” in ⇒ P.139

“4. Mode Setting”.

C Press the {Start}key.

The drum unit idles.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

Note

TPES050N

❒ You can change the number of

spins in Manual Quality Start

mode with the user tools. See

“Idling for Q.start” in ⇒ P.139 “4.

Mode Setting”.

D Make your prints.

❒ You can change the number of

spins after the fixed time period

has passed in Auto Quality Start

mode with the user tools. See “No.

of Q.start” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Job Separation—Separating Printing Sets On The Paper Delivery Tray

Job Separation—Separating Printing Sets

On The Paper Delivery Tray

The print on the top of each print set on the paper delivery tray is pulled by the

job separator. This function is useful when you make 2 or more print sets.

GRJOBS0E

RCAUTION:

• While printing, do not touch the belt at the end of the paper deliv-

ery tray or the job separator. You might be injured.

Limitation

❒ In Job Separation mode, the following limitations apply:

❖

Metric version

Minimum paper size Maximum paper weight

Paper delivery tray capacity

127.9 g/m²

600 sheets (64 g/m²)

Length: 210 mm

Width: 128 mm

❖

Inch version

Minimum paper size

Maximum paper weight

Paper delivery tray capacity

Length: 8.3"

Width: 5.1"

34 lb

600 sheets (17 lb)

Note

❒ When you use thin paper, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.

The job separator might tear the paper.

❒ If the job separator touches the print image, the completed prints might be

dirty. In this case, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.

❒ When you do not use Job Separation mode, you can select the machine con-

dition after each printing set is fed out to the paper delivery tray with the user

tools. See “Manual Class” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

A Press the {Job Separator}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES220N

B Make your prints.

Note

❒ After the last page of each printing set is fed out to the paper delivery tray,

the job separator pulls the last sheet of each group in Job Separation mode.

The next cycle begins.

TPEH300E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Saving Master

The machine automatically changes

the master length depending on the

paper size you use. This saves both

master and ink.

GRMSAV0E

a = Images on the master

b = Masters

c = Area that you can save master and

ink

Limitation

❒ The optional document feeder is

required.

Note

❒ This function is turned on when

you use A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" K or B5K

paper and you set 2 or more origi-

nals in the optional document

feeder.

❒ You can cancel Master Saving

mode with the user tools. See

“Master Cut Length” in ⇒ P.139

“4. Mode Setting”. You can also

save master using the optional A4,

8¹/₂" × 11" drum. See ⇒ P.90

“Changing The Drum Size”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION

On Line Printing

The images on a personal computer

can be printed using this machine.

B Select A5K, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K , or

Custom (non-standard) with

the [←] or [→] key.

Limitation

❒ The PC controller is required. For

details, refer to the PC controller

manual.

Note

❒ When you use A5, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" K,

or paper of non-standard size, you

need to select the paper size with

the [Ppr. Type] key.

TPES530E

C Press the [OK] key.

❒ When you use non-standard thick-

ness or kind of paper, you need to

select paper type with the [Ppr.

Type] key before pressing the {On

Line}key.

When you use paper sizes other

than A5, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K, or non-

standard paper sizes

A Refer to the PC controller man-

ual.

A Press the {On Line}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES230N

When you use A5, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

K, or non-standard paper sizes

A Press the [Ppr size] key.

TPES570E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Printing Using The Optional Document

Feeder

Insert a stack of originals in the docu-

ment feeder. It will be fed automati-

cally.

• Thin originals that have low stiff-

ness

• Originals with index tabs

• Translucent paper

Originals

The following original sizes set in the

document feeder can be detected.

Setting the following originals in the

document feeder might cause origi-

nal misfeeds or damage to the origi-

nals.

Metric version A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL,

B5 KL, A5KL

11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" × 14"

Inch version

L, 8¹/₂" × 11"KL,

Set the following kinds of originals on

the exposure glass (contact glass).

• Originals heavier than 105 g/m²,

27 lb

• Originals lighter than 52 g/m², 14

8¹/₂" × 5¹/₂"KL

Under the following conditions, the

machine might not detect the origi-

nal. In this case, select the original im-

age area with the {Edge Erase} key.

See ⇒ P.40 “Edge Erase—Erasing Edge

Margins”.

• Originals smaller than 105 mm ×

128 mm, 4.2" × 5.1"

• Originals larger than 297 mm × 864

• When you use originals with index

tabs.

mm, 11.6" × 33.8"

• Stapled or clipped originals

• Perforated or torn originals

• When you use OHP transparencies

or translucent paper.

• When you use dark originals.

• Curled, folded, or creased origi-

nals

• When you use originals with solid

images.

• Originals with any kind of coating,

such as thermal fax paper, art pa-

per, aluminum foil, carbon paper,

or conductive paper

• When you use originals other than

the sizes described above.

Note

• Bound originals such as books

• Damaged originals

❒ Set originals after correction fluid

and ink have completely dried.

Not taking this precaution could

mark the exposure glass (contact

glass) and cause marks to be print-

ed.

• Originals with glue on them

• Pasted originals

• Originals written in pencil

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Basically, set originals as shown be-

low.

B Set the aligned originals face up

into the document feeder.

GRSETT1E

TPEH350E

When you have an optional memory

board and the original is set in a dif-

ferent direction from the print paper,

the machine automatically rotates the

original image by 90° to match the

print paper direction.

Limitation

❒ Approximately 30 originals (80

g/m², 21 lb) can be inserted at

one time in the document feed-

er. The first (top) original will be

fed first.

You cannot set originals of different

sizes at the same time.

Note

When you use thin originals, set one

original at a time in the document

feeder or set them on the exposure

glass (contact glass).

❒ To avoid a multi-sheet feed,

shuffle the originals before set-

ting them in the document feed-

er.

The first 10 mm, 0.4", of the leading

edge and the last 2 mm, 0.08" of the

trailing edge cannot be printed. Make

sure the leading edge margin is at

least 10 mm, 0.4", and the trailing

edge margin is at least 2 mm, 0.08".

❒ The guides must fit snugly

against both sides of the stack.

C Adjust any print settings as nec-

essary, then press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Do not stack originals above the limit

mark.

Auto Cycle

Proof

Setting Originals In The

Document Feeder

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

A Adjust the guide to the original

size.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing Using The Optional Document Feeder

Note

D Make your prints.

❒ The top original will be printed

Program

Clear Modes

on the leading part of print.

Auto Cycle

Proof

B Enter the number of prints with

the Number keys.

Program

Clear Modes

Enter

Start

Auto Cycle

Clear/Stop

Proof

TPES070N

Enter

Note

Start

❒ If the next original has been set

in the document feeder before

the machine stops, that original

is fed automatically and a trial

print is delivered to the paper

delivery tray after the print of

the first original is completed.

Check the image position of the

trial print of the next original. If

necessary, make proof prints

using the {Proof} key to check

the image position again.

Clear/Stop

TPES040N

C Check the print paper size and the

reproduction ratio.

Note

❒ To have the machine choose a

suitable ratio automatically, use

mode. See ⇒ P.32 “Auto Magni-

fication Selection—Having The

Machine Choose The Reproduction

Ratios”.

Combine Originals Printing

With The Document Feeder

D Press the {Combine}key.

Reference

See ⇒ P.63 “Combine Originals—

Combining Originals Into One Print”

for details.

Speed

Slow

Combine

Class

Fast

A Insert the 2 originals face up.

TPES170N

TPEH281E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

E Select [Combine 2] or [Quadruple

]

Manual Class Mode With 2 Or

More Originals Using The

Document Feeder

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

Reference

See ⇒ P.58 “Manual Class Mode

With 2 Or More Originals—Making

Variable Numbers Of Prints From

Different Originals”.

TPES530E

A Press the {Class}key.

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the {Start}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

Proof

Enter

Start

TPES160N

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

B Select [Manual] with the [→] or {}}

key.

H Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

TPES570E

❒ After the first original has been

stored, the second original is

fed.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Enter the desired number of

prints for the first original with

the Number keys.

❒ If you set only one original, the

beeper sounds after the first

original has been scanned in.

Set the second original and the

any print settings you require.

Then, press the {Start}key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing Using The Optional Document Feeder

Note

E Press the {Enter}key.

❒ The originals are fed from the

top of the stack. Make sure that

the originals are set in the cor-

rect sequence with the first orig-

inal on the top.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

J Press the {Start}key.

Clear/Stop

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

TPES020N

Proof

F Enter the desired number of

prints for the second original

with the Number keys.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

TPES050N

Proof

K Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

TPES040N

G Press the {Enter}key.

Note

L Press the {Auto Cycle}key.

❒ Repeat steps F and G for each

Program

Clear Modes

original.

Auto Cycle

❒ The number of prints for up to

Proof

20 originals can be stored.

H Press the [OK] key.

Enter

Start

I Set your originals face up in the

Clear/Stop

document feeder.

TPES150N

Note

❒ In Auto Cycle mode, printing

starts automatically after a trial

print is delivered.

TPEH350E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

M Press the {Print}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES070N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Printing Using The Optional Color Drum

Color Printing Using The Optional Color

Drum

Color drum units (red, blue, green,

and brown) are available as options in

Changing The Color Drum Unit

addition to the standard black unit.

For making color prints, a separate

A Open the front door.

drum unit is necessary for each color.

Note

❒ If the ink on the color drum dries,

use the Quality Start function. See

⇒ P.76 “Quality Start Mode— Re-

gaining The Image Density When The

Ink On The Drum Dries”.

TPEH071E

Making Color Prints

B Lower lock lever B1.

A Make sure that the Color Drum

indicator is lit.

Drum

17 8¹/²Color

TPEH080E

C Pull out the drum unit handle B2

TPES024N

slowly.

B Press the {Start}key.

C Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”.)

TPEH090E

D Lift upper drum stay B3 a little to

D Make your prints.

unlock the drum unit, then pull

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

out the drum unit while holding

handle B2 and drum stay B3.

H Lift the drum unit lock lever.

TPEH081E

TPEH100E

I Close the front door.

Important

❒ Be careful not to let the drum

Note

unit fall.

❒ Make sure that the Open Cover/

Unit indicator turns off, and the

Color Drum indicator lights.

E Lower lock lever B1 of the option-

al color drum.

F Insert the color drum unit along

Printing In Two Colors

the guide rail.

After printing in one color, you can

print in another color on the same

side of the print.

TPEH290E

G Slide in the drum unit until it

locks in position.

GRCOLO0E

Note

❒ Leave the prints for a while before

printing on them again to let the

ink dry.

❒ If the prints are not dry, the paper

feed roller might become dirty. In

this case, wipe off the roller with a

cloth.

TPEH091E

❒ You cannot print in two colors at

one time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Printing Using The Optional Color Drum

A Prepare the two originals. Set the E Press the {Print}key.

first original on the exposure

glass (contact glass).

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES070N

TPEH270E

F Remove the prints from the paper

delivery tray and set them on the

paper feed tray again as shown in

the illustration.

B Enter the number of prints with

the Number keys.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPEY042E

TPES040N

C Press the {Start}key.

G Exchange the drum unit. See ⇒

P.87 “Changing The Color Drum

Unit”.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES050N

TPEH101E

D Check the image position of the

trial or proof print.

H Set the second original and press

the {Start}key.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image

=] key (see ⇒ P.25 “Adjusting

Print Image Position”).

I Check the image position.

J Press the {Print}key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Changing The Drum Size

To save costs on master rolls and ink,

you can shorten the length of each

master by changing to an optional

smaller drum.

Printing Area (at 23

% RH)

C/73 F, 65

❖

Metric version

A3 drum

More then 290 × 419 mm,

11.4" × 16.4"

A4 drum

More than 290 × 200 mm

❖

Inch version

11" × 17"

drum

More then 290 × 409 mm,

11.4" × 16.1"

8¹/₂" × 11"

More than 11.4" × 7.8"

drum

Master Cut Length

A3 drum…320 mm × 530 mm, 12.5" ×

20.9", 200 masters/roll

11" × 17" drum…320 × 540 mm, 12.5"

× 21.3", 200 masters/roll

Optional A4 8¹/₂" × 11" drum…320

mm × 325 mm, 12.5" × 12.8", 330 mas-

ters/roll

Note

❒ To change the drum unit, follow

the same procedure as ⇒ P.87

“Changing The Color Drum Unit”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Rotation—Rotating Original Images

Image Rotation—Rotating Original

Images

When the direction in which your original is set is different from that of the pa-

per, and your machine is equipped with the optional memory board, the ma-

chine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper

direction.

Note

❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used in Image Rotation

mode.

❖

Metric version

Original A3L

B4L

A4L

A4K

B5L

B5K

A5K ✩

Paper

A4L

★

A4K

B5L

B5K

A5L

B6L

★

★: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-

per direction.

✩: Set this original in the optional document feeder.

❖

Inch version

8 ¹/₂" × 14"L 8 ¹/₂" × 11"L 8 ¹/₂" × 11"K 8 ¹/₂" × 5 ¹/₂

8¹/₂" × 5¹/₂"

Original 11" × 17"L

L ✩

K ✩

Paper

8 ¹/₂" × 11"L

★

8 ¹/₂" × 11"K

★

8 ¹/₂" × 5¹/

₂"L

★

★: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-

per direction.

✩: Set these originals in the optional document feeder.

Note

❒ When you select Zoom mode or you select non-standard size originals or pa-

per, the image will not be rotated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

❒ It takes longer than usual to make masters in Image Rotation mode.

❒ You can cancel Image Rotation mode with the user tools. See “Auto Rotation”

in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing Features

Make-up mode enables you to do more than just make an exact copy of the orig-

inal. A variety of editing and image processing functions allow you to quickly

and easily customize your prints.

Limitation

❒ The memory board option is required for this feature.

Main Features

The use of command sheets allows you to create special effects without cutting

and pasting - up to 4 commands can be given for an original. By combining

Make-up functions with color drums, you can create a variety of printing effects.

Make-up Modes For Designated Areas

Mode

Sample

Designated Area

Command sheet/Original

(Closed area method)

Letter mode

WORLD

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

Photo mode

HAWAII

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Delete Area mode

Outline mode

Hello!

How are you?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Mode

Sample

Designated Area

Command sheet/Original

(Closed area method)

P./N. mode (Positive

Negative mode)

BALLET

Solid mode (Image Pat-

tern mode)

BALLET

All Page Pattern mode

(Area Pattern mode)

LUNCH

All + Outline (Image

Outline and Area Pat-

tern mode)

CAT

Make-up Modes For Outside Designated Areas

Mode

Sample

Undesignated Area

Command sheet/Original

Letter mode: The area

outside designated ar-

eas is printed in Letter

mode.

HAWAII

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Photo mode: The area

outside designated ar-

eas is printed in Photo

mode.

WORLD

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing Features

Mode

Sample

Undesignated Area

Command sheet/Original

Save Area mode: The

area outside the desig-

nated areas is deleted.

HAWAII

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Outline mode: The area

outside the designated

area is printed in Out-

line mode.

HAWAII

Note

❒ In Make-up mode, commands must be given for both designated areas and

outside the designated area.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Background Patterns

There is a total of 164 background patterns for Make-up mode:

• 40 basic patterns

• 40 patterns similar to the basic patterns but with patterns elements at 4 times

the size.

• 90° rotations of all the basic and enlarged patterns.

• 4 registered user patterns.

*= Paper Feed Direction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing Features

Note

❒ The basic patterns are numbered 1 to 40.

❒ You can make your own make-up background patterns with the user tools.

See ⇒ P.161 “5-15 Make/Chg. Pattern”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Making A Command Sheet For Make-Up

Printing

Command sheets are fed first so that

the machine can recognize the areas

of the original which are to be edited

as designated areas.

through the paper and get the ex-

posure glass (contact glass) dirty.

Command sheet

The command sheet is a sheet of pa-

per for designating areas to be edited.

Command sheets must be made on

white or translucent paper, and

should be the same size as the origi-

nal.

You can designate areas within the

following limits:

GRCOMM0E

1. 5 mm, 0.2"

2. 0 mm, 0"

3. 0 mm, 0"

4. 0 mm, 0"

Note

❒ Poor quality paper (such as news-

print, recycled paper, etc.) should

not be used for command sheets

because any dark spots or streaks

will be read as designated areas.

❒ Do not use blotting paper or other

absorbent paper for command

sheets because ink might leak

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Making A Command Sheet For Make-Up Printing

How To Make A Command Sheet

There are two ways of designating areas: the diagonal line method and the

closed area method.

-Features

• You can combine up to 4 command sheets when making a master.

• You cannot use both the closed and diagonal line method on the same com-

mand sheet.

• You can designate many areas on one sheet and there is no limit to the num-

ber of areas you can designate.

• If designated areas on two or more command sheets overlap, the last com-

mand sheet will apply for the overlapping portion.

• If you use Outline mode for letter images with a thickness of less than 3 mm,

0.12", you might not get the proper print image.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

-Notes about drawing a command sheet

The image might differ depending on how the designated area is drawn, so re-

member the following when making the command sheet:

Designated area

Area recognized

Preferred designated area

Part of the designated area

is surrounded by 3 sides of

the entire area.

Make a space of at least 2 mm,

0.08", in front of the area sur-

rounded by 3 sides (relative to

the feed direction).

1, 2 = 2 mm, 0.08"

Double line pattern.

Only the outer line is Make a gap of at least 2 mm, 0.08"

recognized.

in width.

The designated area is sur-

rounded by 3 sides of an-

other designated area.

Make a space of at least 2 mm,

0.08" in front of the area sur-

rounded by 3 sides (relative to

the feeding direction).

1, 2 = 2 mm, 0.08"

Non-closed line

Designate the area with a closed line.

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Making A Command Sheet For Make-Up Printing

When using the diagonal line method

Note

❒ A diagonal line must be drawn through the area that you wish to edit.

A Put the command sheet on top of the original.

ZM-20

B Draw a line using a felt tip pen (black, red or blue) with a thickness of at

least 1 mm.

ZM-21

Note

❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.

❒ The diagonal line can be drawn from left to right or vice versa.

❒ Draw the line at least 2 mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the com-

plete image can be recognized.

GRCOMM1E

a, b, c, d = 2 mm, 0.08"

❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2 mm, 0.08",

from any neighboring image.

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

GRCOMM2E

a, b, c = 2 mm, 0.08"

When using the closed area method

Note

❒ The line designating the area must be a closed loop.

A Put the command sheet on top of the original.

ZM-20

B Using a black, red, or blue felt tip pen, draw a line around the area to des-

ignate. The line should have a thickness of at least 1 mm.

ZM-26

Note

❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.

❒ Draw the line at least 2 mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the com-

plete image can be recognized.

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Making A Command Sheet For Make-Up Printing

GRCOMM3E

a = Line marking the designated area

b = 2 mm, 0.08"

c = Image within the designated area

❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2 mm, 0.08",

from any neighboring image.

GRCOMM4E

a = 2 mm, 0.08"

b = Neighboring image

c = Line marking the designated area

d = image within the designated area

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Command Sheets And Finished Prints

The following illustrations will help you understand how to draw a command

sheet.

❖

When drawing a command sheet using a diagonal line

The diagonal line method is easy to use for designating rectangular areas. It is

also more precise, but it is difficult to use for designating complex areas.

❖

When drawing a command sheet using a closed line

fruit

The closed line method is easier to use for complex areas, but it is less precise. It

also takes longer to draw a command sheet with the closed line method.

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing

A Press the {Make-Up}key.

E Select the mode for the first com-

mand sheet with the [←], [→],

{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES310N

TPES530E

B Make sure that [1] is selected.

F Press the [OK] key.

Then press the [OK] key.

G If necessary, select the pattern for

the first command sheet with the

{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key. Then

press the [OK] key.

TPES560E

C Select the frame shape with the

H If necessary, select the size and

direction of the pattern you se-

lected in step G with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

D Press the [OK] key.

TPES530E

I Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ Follow steps B – I for the other

command sheets.

❒ You can select a pattern regis-

tered with the user tools for

only one command sheet.

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

age density with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

J After you have finished designat-

ing modes for all the command

sheets, select [Outside Area] with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}} key.

Then press the [OK] key.

TPES530E

Note

❒ Four coarseness settings are

available:

• Setting 4: coarsest

• Setting 3: coarser than setting

TPES530E

K Select the mode for the outside

area with the [←], [→], {~}, or

{}}key.

• Setting 2: coarser than setting

• Setting 1: coarser than the

standard setting

N Press the [OK] key.

O Set the first command sheet face

down on the exposure glass (con-

tact glass) and press the {Start

key.

}

TPES530E

Program

Clear Modes

L Press the [OK] key.

Auto Cycle

Note

Proof

❒ When you select Photo mode

for both inside and outside ar-

eas, you cannot select different

coarseness and image density.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

❒ When you want to confirm your

TPES050N

settings, press the {Make-Up

}

key twice. Then press the [OK

]

The beeper sounds after the com-

mand sheet is scanned.

key repeatedly until the panel

display reaches the setting you

want to confirm.

Note

❒ Repeat step O for the other com-

M If you have selected Photo mode,

mand sheets.

select the coarseness and the im-

P Set the original face down on the

exposure glass (contact glass) and

press the {Start}key.

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing With The Optional Document Feeder

Make-up Printing With The Optional

Document Feeder

Under the following conditions, you

should set command sheets and the

original on the exposure glass (con-

tact glass).

A Press the {Make-Up}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

• When using paste-up originals.

Make-Up

Darker 2

• When the command sheets and

original are of different size.

Overlay

Tint

With the optional document feeder,

you can designate areas to be edited

in Make-up mode within the follow-

ing limits:

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES310N

B Make sure that [1] is selected.

Then press the [OK] key.

GRCOMM0E

TPES560E

1 = 3 mm, 0.12"

2 = 3 mm, 0.12"

3 = 3 mm, 0.12"

4 = 3 mm, 0.12"

C Select the frame shape with the

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

Note

❒ When using coated paper or trans-

parent paper as a command sheet,

set the command sheet and origi-

nal separately into the document

feeder.

TPES530E

D Press the [OK] key.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

E Select the mode for the first com- J After you have finished designat-

mand sheet with the [←], [→],

{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}key.

ing modes for all the command

sheets, select [Outside Area] with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}} key.

Then press the [OK] key.

TPES530E

F Press the [OK] key.

G If necessary, select the pattern for

the first command sheet with the

{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key. Then

press the [OK] key.

K Select the mode for the outside

area with the [←], [→], {~}, or

{}}key.

H If necessary, select the size and

direction of the pattern you se-

lected in step G with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

L Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ When you select Photo mode

for both inside and outside ar-

eas, you cannot select different

coarseness and image density.

❒ When you want to confirm your

TPES530E

settings, press the {Make-Up

}

key twice. Then press the [OK

]

I Press the [OK] key.

key repeatedly until the panel

display reaches the setting you

want to confirm.

Note

❒ Follow steps B – I for the other

command sheets.

M When you select Photo mode, se-

lect the coarseness and image

❒ You can select a pattern regis-

tered with the user tools for

only one command sheet.

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing With The Optional Document Feeder

density with the [←], [→], {~}, or

{}}key.

TPES530E

Note

❒ Four coarseness settings are

available:

• Setting 4: coarsest

• Setting 3: coarser than setting

• Setting 2: coarser than setting

• Setting 1: coarser than the

standard setting

N Press the [OK] key.

O Set the command sheets and orig-

inal face up into the document

feeder.

Note

❒ Make sure that the command

sheets are set on the original.

P Press the {Start}key.

Note

❒ If a command sheet or an origi-

nal misfeeds, remove the misfed

sheets or original and reset it

into the document feeder. It is

not necessary to reset the previ-

ous command sheets or origi-

nal.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Make-up Samples

-Sample 1

A Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape , Designated area: Delete Area mode

B Outside area: Letter mode

C Print

ZM-50

1. Original

2. Command sheet No.1

3. Print

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Samples

-Sample 2

A Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape/, Designated area: All + Outline No. 30

B Command Sheet No. 2 Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern No.

C Outside area: Fn1

D Print

ZM-51

1. Original

2. Command sheet No.1

3. Command sheet No.2

4. Print

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

-Sample 3

A Print the original as it is

B Change the drum unit for color printing

C Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern

No. 39

D Outside area: Letter mode

E Print

BIRTHDAY

PARTY

BIRTHDAY

PARTY

ZM-52

1. Original

2. Command sheet No.1

3. Print

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Overlay—Merging Images

The machine can merge two different

originals onto the same print paper.

❒ The optional PC controller is re-

quired to use On Line Overlay

mode.

Two types of merging are available:

❒ The original and the image on

the personal computer sizes

should be the same. Otherwise,

you might not get proper print

image.

❖

Overlay

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

A Press the {Overlay}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

GROVER0E

Two different originals are merged

onto the same print paper.

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES320N

Form

B Select one of Image Overlay

modes with the [←], [→], {~}, or

{}}key.

GROVER1E

The image of the original which is

copied first will be a background

image on all copies. The following

originals will be copied with this

background.

TPES530E

C Press the [OK] key.

D Set your originals and press the

On Line Overlay

{

Start}key.

The image from the personal com-

puter and the original image can

be merged onto the same print pa-

per.

Limitation

❒ The optional memory board is

required to use Overlay or Form

mode.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Setting originals on the exposure

glass (contact glass)

Setting originals in the optional

document feeder

A Set the first original on the ex-

A Set originals in the document

posure glass (contact glass).

feeder.

TPEH270E

B Press the {Start}key.

Note

TPEH281E

B Press the {Start}key.

Note

❒ When you select [Form] in

step B, the original for the

template should be set first.

❒ When you select [Form] in

step B, the original for the

template should be on the

top.

❒ To change the background

image in Form mode, press

the {Enter} key. Then set the

next original for the template

and press the {Start}key.

❒ To change the background

image in Form mode, press

the {Enter} key. Then set the

next original for the template

and press the {Start}key.

C Set the next original on the ex-

posure glass (contact glass).

D Press the {Start}key.

Note

❒ When you select [Form] in

step B, repeat steps C and D.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stamping Date—Having The Date Stamped On Your Prints

Stamping Date—Having The Date

Stamped On Your Prints

You can print the date on your prints.

Stamping

Date direc-

tion on the

display

Print image

'98.7.25

98.7.25

GRDATE0E

GRDPOS4E

GRDPOS12

GRDPOS8E

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

Before you use this function, you

have to set the machine's internal

clock with the user tools. See ⇒

P.148 “1-8 Time Setting”.

98.7.25

GRDPOS9E

GRDPOS13

GRDPOS5E

Limitation

❒ The optional memory board is re-

quired.

❒ The font size of the date cannot be

changed.

❒ If you select Page Stamping and

Stamping Date together, the last

stamping direction selected takes

priority.

GRDPOS14

GRDPOS6E

GRDPOS10

Note

❒ The default format of Stamping

Date is “Month Day Year”. You

can change this setting with the

user tools. See “Date Style Set” in

⇒ P.144 “5. Stamp”.

GRDPOS15

GRDPOS11

GRDPOS7E

A Press the {Stamp}key.

❒ You can edit the preset Stamping

Date position. See ⇒ P.158 “5-11

Position (Date)”.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Make-Up

Darker 2

❒ The Stamping date directions on

the panel display and actual print

images are as follows:

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES330N

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

B Make sure that [Date] is selected.

Setting your original (K) on the

exposure glass (contact glass)

A Set your original as shown in

the illustration.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select the desired Stamping Date

position and direction with the

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPEH270E

Setting your originals (K) in the

optional document feeder

TPES530E

A Set your originals as shown in

E Press the [OK] key.

the illustration.

F Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

TPES580E

TPEH281E

Note

❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish

to set the other Stamp functions.

G Set your original and press the

{

Start}key.

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page Stamping—Having Page Numbers Stamped On Your Prints

Page Stamping—Having Page Numbers

Stamped On Your Prints

You can print page numbers on your

prints.

Page

Print image

Stamping

direction

on the dis-

play

P.1

1/5

P.1

1/5

– 1 –

–1–

GRPPOS6E

–1–

GRPPOS4E

GRPAGE0E

Three numbering formats are avail-

able:

• P1, P2,....., P5

• 1/5, 2/5,....., 5/5

• -1-, -2-,....., -3-

GRPPOS7E

GRPPOS5E

❒ You can edit the preset page num-

bering position with the user tools.

See ⇒ P.160 “5-14 Position (Page)”.

❒ [P1, P2,…, P5] is the default for-

mat. You can change this default

setting with the user tools. See

“Type (Page)” in ⇒ P.144 “5.

Stamp”.

Limitation

❒ The optional memory board is re-

quired.

❒ The size and font of Page Stamping

cannot be changed.

❒ If you select Page Stamping and

Stamping Date together, the last

stamping direction selected takes

priority.

A Press the {Stamp}key.

Note

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

❒ The Page Stamping direction on

the panel display and actual print

image are as follows:

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES330N

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

B Press the [OK] key.

B Select the [Page] with the [→] or

{}}key.

If you selected [1/5, 2/5]

A Enter the last page number of

original with the [←], [→], {~},

or {}}key.

TPES570E

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select the desired format with the

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

Note

❒ You can also enter the page

number with the Number

keys.

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key

and enter the new value.

TPES530E

E Press the [OK] key.

B Press the [OK] key.

C Enter the first page number of

original with the [←], [→], {~},

or {}}key.

If you selected [P1, P2] or [-1-, -2-]

A Enter the first page number of

original with the [←], [→], {~},

or {}}key.

TPES530E

Note

TPES530E

❒ You can also enter the page

number with the Number

keys.

Note

❒ You can also enter the page

number with the Number

keys.

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key

and enter the new value.

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key

and enter the new value.

D Press the [OK] key.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page Stamping—Having Page Numbers Stamped On Your Prints

Note

F Select the desired orientation

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

❒ Repeat step I for the other

originals.

Setting your originals (K) in the

optional document feeder

A Set your originals as shown in

the illustration.

TPES530E

G Press the [OK] key.

H Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

TPEH281E

Note

❒ The first original should be

TPES580E

on the top.

Note

❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish

to set the other Stamp functions.

I Set your original and press the

{

Start}key.

Setting your originals (K) on the

exposure glass (contact glass)

A Set the first original as shown

in the illustration.

TPEH270E

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Stamping Function—Printing Preset

Messages On Your Prints

A Press the {Stamp}key.

Priority

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Preliminary

Confidential

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

GRSTAM0E

TPES330N

One of the following 3 messages can

be stamped on prints.

B Select [Stamp] with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

Confidential

Priority

Preliminary

Limitation

❒ The optional memory board is re-

quired.

TPES530E

❒ This function cannot be used with

User Stamping.

C Press the [OK] key.

❒ Only one message can be stamped

at a time.

D Select the desired message with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

Note

❒ You can change some Stamping

Function settings (preset stamping

position, size, or density) with the

user tools. See “Type”, “Size”,

“Stamp Density”, “Stamp Posi-

tion”, in ⇒ P.144 “5. Stamp”.

TPES530E

❒ The message “Confidential” is se-

lected as a default. You can change

this default setting with the user

tools. See “Type” in ⇒ P.144 “5.

Stamp”.

E Press the [OK] key.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stamping Function—Printing Preset Messages On Your Prints

F Select the page to be stamped

Setting your original (K) on the

exposure glass (contact glass)

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

A Set your original as shown in

the illustration.

TPES530E

G Press the [OK] key.

TPEH270E

H Select the stamping position with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

Setting your originals (K) in the

optional document feeder

A Set your originals as shown in

the illustration.

TPES530E

I Press the [OK] key.

J Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

TPEH281E

TPES580E

Note

❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish

to set the other Stamp functions.

K Set your original and press the

{

Start}key.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

User Stamping—Printing Your Own

Messages On Your Prints

Up to 4 messages which you use fre-

A Press the {Stamp}key.

quently can be stored in the machine

memory. You can have these messag-

es stamped on your prints.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Make-Up

Darker 2

Overlay

Tint

Skip Feed

Edge Erase

Economy Mode

Job Separator

TPES330N

B Select [User Stamping] with the

GRUSTA0E

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

Preparation

You have to store your message

with the user tools. See ⇒ P.158 “5-

8 Regist. (User)”.

Limitation

❒ The optional memory board is re-

TPES530E

quired.

C Press the [OK] key.

❒ This function cannot be used with

the Stamping Function.

D Select the desired user stamp

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

❒ Only one message can be stamped

at a time.

❒ The registered user stamp cannot

be deleted. If you want to change

the registered user stamp, over-

write it.

Note

❒ You can change some User Stamp-

ing settings (preset stamping posi-

tion, size, or density) with the user

tools. See “Size (User Stamp)”,

“Density (User)”, “Position (Us-

er)” in ⇒ P.144 “5. Stamp”.

TPES530E

E Press the [OK] key.

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Stamping—Printing Your Own Messages On Your Prints

F Select the page to be stamped

Setting your original (K) on the

exposure glass (contact glass)

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

A Set your original as shown in

the illustration.

TPES530E

G Press the [OK] key.

TPEH270E

H Select the stamping position with

the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

Setting your originals (K) in the

optional document feeder

A Set your originals as shown in

the illustration.

TPES530E

I Press the [OK] key.

J Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

TPEH281E

TPES580E

Note

❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish

to set the other Stamp functions.

K Set your original and press the

{

Start}key.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Memory Combine—Combining Originals

Into One Print With The Memory Board

You can combine originals in four ways:

❖

4 One-sided Originals

4 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 4 original images on one

side.

→

1 One-sided Print Of 4 Images

8 One-sided Originals

8 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 8 original images on one

side.

→

1 One-sided Print Of 8 Images

16 One-sided Originals

16 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 16 original images on

one side.

→

1 One-sided Print Of 16 Images

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Print

1 original image is printed repeatedly.

Limitation

❒ The optional memory board is required.

Note

❒ A separation Line between images can be printed with the user tools. See

“Comb. Sep. Line” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine—Combining Originals Into One Print With The Memory Board

Combine 4, 8, or 16 Originals – 4, 8, or 16 One-sided Originals

1 One-sided Print Of 4, 8, or 16 Images

→

❖

4 One-sided Originals

→

1 One-sided Print Of 4 Images

GRMCOM0E

❖

8 One-sided Originals

→

1 One-sided Print Of 8 Images

GRMCOM1E

❖

16 One-sided Originals

→

1 One-sided Print Of 16 Images

10 11 12

13 14 15 16

GRMCOM2E

Limitation

❒ When your machine is equipped with the optional document feeder, you can

use 16 one-sided originals → 1 one-sided print of 16 images mode.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

❒ If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is corrected within the

range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the im-

age might not be copied.

❒ The machine cannot copy originals different in size and direction.

Note

❒ The number of originals printed (combined) can be 4, 8, or 16.

❒ In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This

reproduction ratio depends on the print paper sizes and the number of origi-

nals.

❒ When the original is set at a different direction from the print paper, the ma-

chine automatically rotates the original image by 90 ° to match the print paper

direction.

❒ You can set the machine to cancel Memory Combine mode after finishing

your print job with the user tools. See “Cancel Comb” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

❒ Refer to the following table when you select the original and paper sizes.

❖

When you set originals in the optional document feeder (Metric version)

Original A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

A5KL

Paper

A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

❖

When you set originals in the optional document feeder (Inch version)

8¹/₂" × 14"L 8¹/₂" × 11"KL

8¹/₂" × 5¹/₂"KL

Original 11" × 17"L

Paper

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" L

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine—Combining Originals Into One Print With The Memory Board

❖

When you set originals on the exposure glass (contact glass) (Metric version)

Original A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

Paper

A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

❖

When you set originals on the exposure glass (contact glass) (Inch version)

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

Original 11" × 17"L

Paper

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" L

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

A Press the {Combine}key.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

TPES170N

B Select [Memory Combine] with the [←] or {~}key.

TPES550E

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select one of the desired combine modes.

TPES530E

E Press the [OK] key.

F Set your originals.

Setting your original (K) on the exposure glass (contact glass)

A Set your original as shown in the illustration.

TPEH270E

Setting your originals (K) in the optional document feeder

A Set your originals as shown in the illustration.

TPEH281E

G Press the {Start}key.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine—Combining Originals Into One Print With The Memory Board

Note

❒ Even if the number of originals is less than the number required in the se-

lected mode, prints can be made, as shown in the illustration. In this case,

press the {Enter}key after all the originals have been scanned.

GRMCOM3E

❒ When you set original on the exposure glass (contact glass) or set one sheet

at a time in the optional document feeder, repeat steps F and G. After set-

ting the last original, press the {Enter}key and the {Start}key.

Repeat—Repeating An Image Over The Entire Print

GRREPE0E

Limitation

❒ Part of the repeated image might not be printed depending on paper size, di-

rection or reproduction ratio.

Note

❒ The number of repeated images depends on the original and paper size, and

reproduction ratio.

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

❒ The original and paper setting direction and the number of repeated images

are as follows:

❖

For example, when you use A4

originals and A3L paper.

The number of repeated

images

Reproduction ratio

Print image

71 %

GRREPE3E

❖

For example, when you set A5L originals in the optional document feeder and

you use A3L paper.

The number of repeated

images

Reproduction ratio

Print image

50 %

GRREPE4E

❖

For example, when you use 8¹/₂"

11"

originals and 11"

17"

paper.

The number of repeated

images

Reproduction ratio

Print image

100 %

GRREPE5E

❖

For example, when you set A5L originals in the optional document feeder and

you use A4K paper.

The number of repeated

images

Reproduction ratio

Print image

50 %

GRREPE6E

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine—Combining Originals Into One Print With The Memory Board

A Press the {Combine}key.

Speed

Slow

Combine

Class

Fast

TPES170N

B Select [Memory Combine] with the [←] or {~}key.

TPES550E

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select [Repeat] with the [←] or {~}key.

TPES550E

E Press the [OK] key.

F Select the proper reproduction ratio.

Reference

See ⇒ P.30 “Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset

Ratios”.

G Set your original.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

Setting your original (K) on the exposure glass (contact glass)

A Set your original as shown in the illustration.

TPEH270E

Setting your originals (K) in the optional document feeder

A Set your originals as shown in the illustration.

TPEH281E

H Press the {Start}key.

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. USER TOOLS

Accessing The User Tools

This section is for the key operators in

charge of this machine. You can

change or set the machine's default

settings.

Note

❒ [Next]: Press to go to the next

page.

❒ [Prev.]: Press to go back to the

A Press the {User Tools}key.

previous page.

B Press the [OK] key.

User Tools

C Search for the desired user tool

number of each function with

the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

D Press the [OK] key.

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

Using the number keys

TPES250N

A Enter the desired user tool

number (1 to 6) with the Num-

ber keys.

B Select the desired user tools

menu. See ⇒ P.135 “User Tools

Menu”.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

Using the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}

key

TPES040N

A Search for the desired user tool

number (1 to 6) with the {~},

{}}, {|}, or {{}key.

B Press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

C Enter the desired user tool

number of each function with

the Number keys.

D Press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

C Change the settings by following

the instructions on the panel dis-

play. Then press the [OK] key.

Speed

Fast

Clear/S

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

TPES090N

press the {Clear/Stop}key before

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

pressing the [OK] key. Then en-

ter the new value.

❒ [Cancel]: Press to return to the

previous menu without chang-

ing any data.

D Press the {User Tools} key to re-

turn to the Ready condition.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

Note

❒ The settings are not canceled

even if the main switch is

turned off or the {Clear Modes

key is pressed.

}

❒ You can also return to the

Ready condition by pressing the

[

Cancel] key.

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

Reference

For how to access the user tools, see ⇒ P.133 “Accessing The User Tools”.

1. System

No.

Mode

Description

Auto Reset

The machine returns to its initial condition automatically

after your job is finished. The automatic reset time can be

set from 1 to 5 minutes or off (0 minute).

Note

❒ Default: off

R. Counter Dis- Use to display the total number of masters and prints.

play

Note

❒ A trial print delivered to the paper delivery tray after

pressing the {Start}key will not be counted.

Reset R.

Counter

Choose whether the total number of masters and prints is

reset.

Note

❒ Default: Not clear

Set User Code

mm/inch

Selects User Code mode. For details about User Code

mode, see ⇒ P.146 “6. Set User Code (s)”.

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

Choose the units of measurement shown on the panel dis-

play.

Note

❒ Default:

• Metric version: mm

• Inch version: inch

Language on

LCD

The language used for panel display messages can be se-

lected.

Note

❒ Default: English

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

No.

Mode

Description

Time Setting

Use to set the machine's internal clock.

Note

❒ The clock must be adjusted if you change the clock to

daylight saving time/summer time, or return to stan-

dard time.

Reference

For how to set the clock, see ⇒ P.148 “1-8 Time Setting”.

Auto Online

Data Print

Specifies whether On Line mode is automatically selected

when the machine detects the data from the personal com-

puter.

Note

❒ Default: ON

Use to print out the following data.

Note

❒ Available settings:

• Log Data (Number of prints made, how many times

paper misfeeds occur and so on.)

• Reset Counters (Number of prints and master made

under each user code)

• Store Class (Registered number of students in each

class.)

2. Set Operation Modes

No.

Mode

Description

Min. Quantity The minimum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.

Example: If you specify 20 as minimum number of prints,

runs of 20 or more prints will be accepted, runs of less then

20 prints will not be accepted.

Note

❒ Default: 0

Max. Quantity The maximum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.

Note

❒ Default: 9999

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

Copy Count

Display

The counter can be set to show the number of prints made

(Up), or the number of prints remaining to be made

(Down).

Note

❒ Default: Down

Panel Beeper

Turns the beeper on or off.

Note

❒ Default: STD. (standard)

❒ Available settings:

• ALL ON (The beeper sounds when you press a key or

when warning messages appear on the panel dis-

play.)

• STD. (When you press a key, the beeper does not

sound. When warning messages appear on the panel

display, the beeper sounds.)

• ALL OFF (The beeper does not sound when you

press keys or when warning messages appear on the

panel display.)

LCD Contrast You can adjust the brightness of the panel display.

3. Initial Setting

No.

Mode

Description

Paper Type

Specifies the paper type at power on.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (Standard)

MSTR Makg.

Density

Specifies the image density at power on.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (Standard)

Original Priori- Specifies the original mode at power on.

Note

❒ Default: Letter

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

No.

Mode

Description

Reproduction

Ratio

Adjust a fixed reproduction ratio between 50 and 200 %.

Note

❒ Default:

• Metric version: 71 %, 82 %, 87 %, 93 %, 100 %, 115 %,

122 %, 141 %

• Inch version: 65 %, 74 %, 77 %, 93 %, 100 %, 121 %, 129

%, 155 %

Reference

For how to set the ratios, see ⇒ P.148 “3-4 Reproduction

Ratio”.

Class Enter No. Before using All Class or Auto Class mode, register the

number of students in each class with this function.

Note

❒ Default: Class 1 – 4: 30 Class 5 – 12: 0

❒ You can store student numbers for up to 9 grades with

12 classes in each, giving a maximum of 108 classes. Each

class can have up to 9999 students.

Reference

For how to register the number of students, see ⇒ P.149

“3-5 Class Enter No.”.

Photo (Light-

ness)

Specifies the lightness in Photo or Letter/Photo mode when

you press the [Original] key.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (Standard)

Photo (Screen) Specifies the screen image in Photo mode when you press

the [Original] key.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (Standard)

Tint Mode

ON/OFF

Specifies whether Tint mode is selected at power on.

Note

❒ Default: OFF

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

Margin Erase

Area

Adjust the erase edges margin.

Note

❒ Default: 2 mm, 0.1"

Reference

For how to adjust the erase edges area, see ⇒ P.150 “3-9

Margin Erase Area”.

Ppr. Size [On-

line]

Specifies the paper size when you press the {On Line}key.

Note

❒ Default: Auto

4. Mode Setting

No.

Mode

Description

Auto Cycle

ON/OFF

Specifies whether Auto Cycle mode is selected at power on.

Note

❒ Default: OFF

Class Manual

Set

You can use one original or multiple originals in Manual

Class mode.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (One original)

Ignore Paper

Size

If you are making prints on non-standard paper and the

original image does not entirely appear on the print, set pa-

per size detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not detect

the length of paper.

Note

❒ Default: Not to Ignore

No Orig. Size

(ADF)

When you set long originals in the optional document feed-

er, set original detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not

detect the original size.

Note

❒ Default: Not to Ignore

No Orig. Size

When you set originals of non standard sizes on the expo-

sure glass (contact glass), set original detection to “Ignore”.

The machine will not detect the original size.

Note

❒ Default: Not to Ignore

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

No.

Mode

Description

Background

ON/OFF

When you make prints in Photo, Letter/Photo, or Tint

mode, the background of the prints might become dirty.

Turn Background On to improve the clarity of your prints.

Note

❒ Default: w/o back. correction (off)

Longer Paper

Combine

You can select whether you can use paper longer than 432

mm, 17.0" or not.

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

If you select “Automatic (Auto Combine mode)”, you can

make two or four identical images on the one sheet by

pressing the {Combine}key and {Start}key.

Note

❒ Default: Normal (Combine Originals mode)

Reference

For how to use Auto Combine mode, see ⇒ P.68 “Auto

Combine Mode—Having Images Repeated On One Print”.

Comb. Sep.

Line

You can select a separation line in Memory Combine mode.

Limitation

❒ You can use this function only when you have an op-

tional memory board.

Note

❒ Default: None

❒ Available settings:

GRLINE0E

• a = None

• b = Solid

• c = Broken 1

• d = Broken 2

• e = Crop Marks

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

Cancel Comb.

Specifies whether Combine Originals or Memory Combine

mode is cleared after finishing your print job.

Note

❒ Default: Not to cancel

No. of Skip

Feed

Specifies the number of drum rotations in Skip Feed mode

at power on. You can also select whether you can change

the number of drum rotations temporarily when you press

the {Skip Feed}key. See ⇒ P.70 “Skip Feed Printing”.

Note

❒ Default:

• Panel display: Display

• Number of Skip Feed: 2

Reference

For how to change number of rotations, see ⇒ P.151 “4-

11 No. of Skip Feed”.

Idling for

Q.start

When you use the Manual Quality Start function, you can

select how many times the drum unit idles.

Note

❒ Default: 45

Setting Q.start If the machine is not used for a long period of time, the ink

on the drum might dry causing image quality to deterio-

rate. The Auto Quality Start function automatically recov-

ers image density quality after a selected time has passed.

If Auto Quality Start is set to "Not to use", you can regain

print quality by making a few extra prints or you can use

Manual Quality Start mode.

Note

❒ Default: To use

No. of Q.start

You can select how many times the drum unit idles after

the following time periods have passed in Auto Quality

Start mode.

Note

❒ Default: See ⇒ P.152 “4-14 No. of Q.start”.

❒ To increase the print image density, increase the num-

ber of drum rotations, and vice versa.

Reference

For how to change the number of idle spins, see ⇒ P.152

“4-14 No. of Q.start”.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

No.

Mode

Description

Deflector Angle You can change the angle of the wing guide depending on

the paper type you use.

Note

❒ Default: Auto

❒ Available settings:

• Up (Select this setting when standard thickness or

thin paper misfeeds at the paper exit section occur

frequently.)

• Down (Select this setting when A4 – B5, 8¹/₂" × 11"

thick paper is not delivered properly to the paper de-

livery tray.)

Manual Class

When you do not use the Job Separation function, you can

select the machine's condition after each printing set is fed

out to the paper delivery tray.

Note

❒ Default: Stop

❒ Available settings:

• Start printing automatically (After the last page of

each printing set is fed out to the paper delivery tray,

the machine stops for a few seconds. Then, the next

cycle begins.)

• Stop (After the last page of each printing set is fed out

to the paper delivery tray, the machine stops. If you

press the {Print}key, the next cycle begins.)

Auto Separate

Specifies whether Job Separation mode is automatically

carried out when you make prints in All Class, Auto Class,

Manual Class, or Class mode.

Note

❒ Default: ON

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

Ink/Master

Left

Specifies whether you can check the amount of ink and

master.

Note

❒ Default: OFF

❒ Available settings:

• OFF (You cannot check the remaining amount of ink

or master.)

• ON (When the remaining amount of ink or master is

less than half, the panel display indicates these

amounts when you turn on the main switch.)

• Check remaining volume (You can see the remaining

amounts of ink and master regardless of these

amounts.)

Type of Paper

Auto Rotation

When one kind of paper misfeeds occur frequently, you

can register its paper type in [User 1] or [User 2].

Reference

For how to register special paper type, see ⇒ P.154 “4-

19 Type of Paper”.

When the direction in which your original is set is different

from that of the paper, and your machine is equipped with

the optional memory board, the machine automatically ro-

tates the original image by 90° to match the paper direction.

You can cancel this setting.

Note

❒ Default: ON

Master Cut

Length

The machine determines the master length according to the

original set number in the optional document feeder and

the paper sizes. If you wish to use A3/11" × 17" master re-

gardless of the original set number and the paper sizes, se-

lect “A3”.

Note

❒ Default: Auto

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

5. Stamp

Note

❒ You can use these functions only when you have an optional memory board.

No.

Mode

Description

Type

You can change the message selected at power on in the

Stamping function.

Note

❒ Default: Confidential

Size

You can edit the preset stamp sizes.

Note

❒ Default: Standard (about 32 × 64 mm)

❒ Adjustment values:

• Double size

• 4 (4 times)

• 8 (8 times)

Stamp Density You can select the style of the stamps.

Note

❒ Default: Solid-fill

Stamp Position You can edit the preset stamp position co-ordinates.

Note

❒ Default: See ⇒ P.154 “5-4 Stamp Position”.

❒ Available settings: See ⇒ P.154 “5-4 Stamp Position”.

Reference

For how to adjust the stamp position, see ⇒ P.154 “5-4

Stamp Position”.

Size (User

Stamp)

You can edit the preset user stamp sizes.

Note

❒ Default: Standard (about 32 × 64 mm)

❒ Available settings:

• Double size

• 4 (4 times)

• 8 (8 times)

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

Density (User) You can select the style of the user stamps.

Note

❒ Default: Solid-fill

Position (User) You can edit the preset user stamp position co-ordinates.

Note

❒ Default: See ⇒ P.156 “5-7 Position (User)”.

❒ Available settings: See ⇒ P.156 “5-7 Position (User)”.

Reference

For how to adjust the user stamp position, see ⇒ P.156

“5-7 Position (User)”.

Regist. (User)

You can register user stamps.

Note

❒ Registered user stamps can not be deleted. If you want

to change a registered user stamp, overwrite it.

Reference

For how to register a user stamp, see ⇒ P.158 “5-8 Regist.

(User)”.

Date Style Set

You can select the style of the date stamp.

Note

❒ Default: Month Day Year

Date Position

Set

You can select the date stamp direction at power on in

Stamping Date mode.

Note

❒ Default: Upper left

Position (Date) You can edit the preset date stamp position co-ordinates.

Note

❒ Default: See ⇒ P.158 “5-11 Position (Date)”.

❒ Available settings: See ⇒ P.158 “5-11 Position (Date)”.

Reference

For how to adjust the date stamping position, see ⇒

P.158 “5-11 Position (Date)”.

Type (Page)

You can select the page numbering style at power on in

Page Stamping mode.

Note

❒ Default: P1, P2

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

No.

Mode

Description

Direction

(Page)

You can select the page numbering direction at power on in

Page Stamping mode.

Note

❒ Default:

• When you select [P1, P2] or [₁/₅, ₂/₅] with the “Type

(Page)” user tool: Upper right

• When you select [-1-, -2-] with the “Type (Page)” user

tool: Down center

Position (Page) You can edit the preset page numbering position co-ordi-

nates.

Note

❒ Default: See ⇒ P.160 “5-14 Position (Page)”.

❒ Available settings: See ⇒ P.160 “5-14 Position (Page)”.

Reference

For how to adjust the page numbering position, see ⇒

P.160 “5-14 Position (Page)”.

Make/Chg.

Pattern

Make your own background pattern in Make-up mode.

Note

❒ You can edit the 40 preset patterns.

Reference

For how to change the background pattern, see ⇒ P.161

“5-15 Make/Chg. Pattern”.

6. Set User Code (s)

❖

User Code

If the machine is set to use the User Code function, operators must input their user

codes before the machine can operate. The machine keeps count of the number of

copies made under each user code. Turn on User Code mode with the “Set User

Code (s)” user tool. You can also turn on Key Operator Code mode. In Key Opera-

tor Code mode, only the selected key operator can use all the functions below.

Check Counter

You can check the number of masters and copies made

under each user code.

Reference

For how to check the number of masters and copies,

see ⇒ P.162 “6-1 Check Counter”.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

Reset Counters

You can clear each or all user codes' counters.

Note

❒ Default: Single

Reference

For how to clear the number of masters and copies, see

⇒ P.163 “6-2 Reset Counters”.

Reg. User Code

Chg. User Code

You can register user codes.

Note

❒ Up to 20 user codes (up to 4 digits) can be registered.

You can change user codes.

Note

❒ The number of copies made under the old code is add-

ed to that made under the new user code.

Reference

For how to change the user codes, see ⇒ P.163 “6-4

Chg. User Code”.

Del. User Code

You can delete user codes.

Note

❒ The number of copies made under the deleted code is

also deleted.

Reference

For how to delete the user codes, see ⇒ P.164 “6-5 Del.

User Code”.

Key Operator

Code

Sets Key Operator Code mode.

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

Reg/Chg Key-

OpCode

You can register or change key operator codes. (up to 4

digits)

Restricted Access In Key Counter mode, you have to set the key counter be-

fore making prints. (To turn on Key Counter mode, con-

tact your service representative.) If Key Counter mode is

on, Restricted Access is turned on (To use) automatically.

If you turn Restricted Access off (Not to use), you can

make prints without inserting the key counter.

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

User Tool Menus In Detail

E Press the {Enter}key.

1-8 Time Setting

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

A Press the {User Tools}key.

Proof

User Tools

Enter

Start

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Clear/Stop

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

TPES020N

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

F Input the month with the Num-

TPES250N

ber keys.

G Press the {Enter}key.

B Make sure that 1 is selected. Then

press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ Follow steps F and G for the

"date", "hour", "minute", and

"second".

H Press the [OK] key.

TPES560E

3-4 Reproduction Ratio

C Enter 8 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key. A Press the

{

User Tools

}

key.

User Tools

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

D Enter the year with the Number

Make-Up

Overlay

keys.

Tint

TPES250N

B Enter 3 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

C Enter 4 with the Number keys. B Enter 3 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

D Select the ratio you want to adjust C Enter 5 with the Number keys.

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

D Select the grade with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

E Press the [Adjust.] key.

F Enter the desired ratio with the

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

Note

❒ You can also enter the ratio with

E Press the [Enter] key.

the Number keys.

F Select the class with the [←], [→],

G Press the [OK] key twice.

{~}, or {}}key.

3-5 Class Enter No.

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

TPES530E

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

G Enter the number of students B Enter 3 with the Number keys.

with the Number keys. Then

press the {Enter}key.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

C Enter 9 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES120N

Note

D Select the original size you will

use with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

❒ Repeat steps F and G until you

have finished registering num-

ber of students in each class.

H Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ Repeat steps D through H until

you have finished registering

number of students in each class

for the other grades.

TPES530E

I Press the [OK] key.

E Press the [Select] key.

F Adjust the erase edge margin.

3-9 Margin Erase Area

If you selected A3 to A6 or 11" ×

A Press the {User Tools}key.

17" to 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

User Tools

A Adjust the erase edge margin

with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

TPES530E

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

Note

B Enter 4 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

❒ You can also enter the ratio

with the Number keys and

the {Enter}key.

If you selected *

C Enter 11 with the Number keys.

A Enter the erase edge margin

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

with the Number keys.

B Press the {Enter}key.

D Press the [Change] key.

C Enter the vertical length of pa-

per you use with the Number

keys.

D Press the {Enter}key.

E Enter the horizontal width of

paper you use with the Num-

ber keys.

TPES520E

F Press the {Enter}key.

E Change the number of drum rota-

tions while one sheet of paper is

fed with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}

key.

G Press the [OK] key twice.

4-11 No. of Skip Feed

The following procedure explains

how to change the number of drum

rotations.

A Press the {User Tools}key.

TPES530E

User Tools

Note

Image Density

Stamp

❒ You can also change the num-

ber of rotations with the Num-

ber keys.

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

F Press the [OK] key.

Tint

TPES250N

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

4-14 No. of Q.start

Note

❒ The default settings are as follows:

Time period

0 – 4

hours

4 – 24

hours

24 – 72 More

hours

than 72

hours

Temperature Low Tmp. (10 – 15°C, 50 – 59°F)

Normal Tmp. (15 – 28°C, 59 –

82.4°F)

High Tmp. (28 – 30°C, 82.4 –

86°F)

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

B Enter 4 with the Number keys. Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

C Enter 14 with the Number keys. Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

D Select the temperature at which you use this machine with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

E Press the [OK] key.

F Select the time period you want to change how many times the drum unit

idles with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

G Press the [OK] key.

H Select the number of drum rotations with the [←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

TPES530E

I Press the [OK] key.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

F Select the paper type and misfeed

4-19 Type of Paper

condition with the [←] or [→] key.

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

TPES530E

Make-Up

Overlay

G Press the [OK] key.

Tint

TPES250N

H Press the [Cancel] key.

B Enter 4 with the Number keys.

5-4 Stamp Position

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

Note

❒ The default position and available

settings of each stamp are as fol-

lows:

C Enter 19 with the Number keys.

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

D Select [User 1] or [User 2] with the

GPSPOS0E

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

b = 0 mm,

b = – 72 – 72

mm, – 2.88"

– 2.88"

GRSPOS1E

c = center

line

TPES530E

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

E Press the [OK] key.

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

GRSPOS2E

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

Image Density

Lighter

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

Stamp

On Line

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

GRSPOS3E

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

TPES250N

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

b = 0 mm,

B Enter 5 with the Number keys.

b = – 72 – 72

mm, – 2.88"

– 2.88"

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

GRSPOS4E

c = center

line

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

C Enter 4 with the Number keys.

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

GRSPOS5E

a = 0 mm, 0" a = – 52 – 52

mm, – 2.08"

– 2.08"

0.96"

b = 24 mm,

b = 8 – 144

c = center

D Select the stamp position you

want to adjust with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

mm, 0.32" –

line

GRSPOS6E

5.76"

a = 0 mm, 0" a = – 52 – 52

mm, – 2.08"

– 2.08"

b = 0 mm,

b = – 72 – 72

c = center

mm, – 2.88"

line

GRSPOS7E

– 2.88"

a = 0 mm, 0" a = – 52 – 52

TPES530E

mm, – 2.08"

– 2.08"

0.96"

b = 24 mm,

E Press the [Change] key.

b = 8 – 144

c = center

mm, 0.32" –

line

GRSPOS8E

5.76"

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

F Adjust the horizontal stamp posi-

tion with the Number keys.

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

Program

Clear Modes

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

Auto Cycle

b = 0 mm,

Proof

b = – 72 – 72

mm, – 2.88"

– 2.88"

GRSPOS1E

c = center

line

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

TPES040N

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

G Press the {Enter}key.

GRSPOS2E

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

Proof

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

Enter

Start

GRSPOS3E

Clear/Stop

TPES020N

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

H Adjust the vertical stamp position

b = 0 mm,

with the Number keys.

b = – 72 – 72

mm, – 2.88"

– 2.88"

GRSPOS4E

c = center

line

I Press the {Enter}key.

J Press the [OK] key twice.

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

5-7 Position (User)

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

GRSPOS5E

Note

❒ The default position and available

settings of each user stamp are as

follows:

a = 0 mm, 0" a = – 52 – 52

mm, – 2.08"

– 2.08"

0.96"

b = 24 mm,

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

b = 8 – 144

c = center

mm, 0.32" –

line

GRSPOS6E

a = 24 mm, a = 8 – 104

5.76"

0.96"

mm, 0.32" –

4.16"

b = 24 mm,

0.96"

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

GPSPOS0E

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

D Select the user stamp position

you want to adjust with the [←],

[→], {~}, or {}}key.

a = 0 mm, 0" a = – 52 – 52

mm, – 2.08"

– 2.08"

b = 0 mm,

b = – 72 – 72

c = center

mm, – 2.88"

line

GRSPOS7E

– 2.88"

a = 0 mm, 0" a = – 52 – 52

TPES530E

mm, – 2.08"

– 2.08"

0.96"

b = 24 mm,

E Press the [Change] key.

b = 8 – 144

mm, 0.32" –

5.76"

GRSPOS8E

F Adjust the horizontal user stamp

position with the Number keys.

Program

Clear Modes

A Press the {User Tools}key.

Auto Cycle

User Tools

Proof

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Enter

Start

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Clear/Stop

Make-Up

Overlay

TPES040N

Tint

TPES250N

G Press the {Enter}key.

Program

Clear Modes

B Enter 5 with the Number keys.

Auto Cycle

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

C Enter 7 with the Number keys.

TPES020N

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

H Adjust the vertical user stamp po-

sition with the Number keys.

I Press the {Enter}key.

J Press the [OK] key twice.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

E Press the [OK] key.

5-8 Regist. (User)

F Set the original you want to regis-

ter as a user stamp on the expo-

sure glass (contact glass).

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

B Enter 5 with the Number keys.

GRRUST0E

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

a: 64 mm, 2.5"

b: 32 mm, 1.2"

Note

❒ The image area as shown in the

illustration will be registered as

a user stamp.

C Enter 8 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

G Press the [Start] key.

D Select one of the four available

user stamps with the [←], [→],

{~}, or {}}key.

TPES560E

H Press the [Cancel] key.

5-11 Position (Date)

TPES530E

Note

❒ The default position and available

settings of each date stamp are as

follows:

Note

❒ If the stamp you choose is al-

ready being used, the machine

asks whether you wish to over-

write it or not. Select the [Yes] or

[

No] key.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

B Enter 5 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

a = 8 mm,

0.32"

a = 8 – 40

mm, 0.32" –

1.60"

dd.mm.yy

b = 20 mm,

0.80"

b = 8 – 40

mm, 0.32" –

1.60"

GRDPOS0E

C Enter 11 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

dd.mm.yy

GRDPOS1E

D Select the date stamping direction

you want to adjust with the [←],

[→], {~}, or {}}key.

a = 20 mm,

0.80"

b = 12 mm,

0.48"

GRDPOS2E

a = 20 mm,

0.80"

TPES530E

b = 8 mm,

0.32"

E Press the [Change] key.

GRDPOS3E

F Adjust the horizontal date stamp-

ing position with the Number

keys.

A Press the {User Tools}key.

Program

Clear Modes

User Tools

Auto Cycle

Proof

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Enter

Start

Make-Up

Overlay

Clear/Stop

Tint

TPES040N

TPES250N

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

❖

When you select -1-

G Press the {Enter}key.

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

a = 8 mm,

0.32"

a = 8 – 40

mm, 0.32" –

1.60"

Enter

Start

–1–

Clear/Stop

GRPPOS2E

TPES020N

H Adjust the vertical date stamping

position with the Number keys.

GRPPOS3E

I Press the {Enter}key.

J Press the [OK] key twice.

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

5-14 Position (Page)

Image Density

Stamp

Note

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

❒ The default position and available

settings of each page stamp are as

follows:

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

When you select P1 (¹/₅)

TPES250N

❖

Stamp po- Default

sitions

Available

settings

B Enter 5 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

a = 8 mm,

a = 8 – 40

mm, 0.32" –

1.60"

0.32"

P.1

b = 12 mm,

0.48"

b = 8 – 40

mm, 0.32" –

1.60"

GRPPOS0E

C Enter 14 with the Number keys.

a = 12 mm,

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

0.48"

b = 12 mm,

0.48"

GRPPOS1E

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

D Select the page numbering direc- I Press the {Enter}key.

tion you want to adjust with the

[←], [→], {~}, or {}}key.

J Press the [OK] key twice.

5-15 Make/Chg. Pattern

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

TPES530E

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

E Press the [Change] key.

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

F Adjust the horizontal page num-

bering position with the Number

keys.

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

B Enter 5 with the Number keys.

Proof

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES040N

C Enter 15 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

G Press the {Enter}key.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

D Select the background pattern

with the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}

key.

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES020N

H Adjust the vertical page number-

ing position with the Number

keys.

E Press the [Change] key.

Note

❒ You need not follow steps H and

I when you select “-1-” as the

direction in step D.

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

F Move the cursor to the position B Enter 6 with the Number keys.

you wish to edit with the {~},

{}}, {|}, or {{}key.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

C Make sure that 1 is selected. Then

G Press the {Enter} or {Clear/Stop

}

press the [OK] key.

key to edit the pattern.

Program

Clear Modes

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

TPES560E

Clear/Stop

Note

TPES260N

❒ The number of masters and

prints made under the first user

code will be displayed in the

panel display.

Note

❒ To add a dot, press the {Enter

}

key.

D Keep pressing the [→] or {}}key

to display the number of masters

and prints made under your user

code.

❒ To remove a dot, press the

{

Clear/Stop}key.

❒ Repeat steps F and G until you

have finished editing the pat-

tern.

H Press the [OK] key twice.

6-1 Check Counter

TPES570E

A Press the {User Tools}key.

E Press the [OK] key after checking

the number of masters and prints

made under your user code.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus In Detail

masters and prints made under

your user code.

6-2 Reset Counters

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

TPES570E

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

B Press the [OK] key.

C Press the [Yes] key.

Tint

TPES250N

D Press the [Cancel] key twice.

B Enter 6 with the Number keys.

If you selected [All

]

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

A Press the [Yes] key.

6-4 Chg. User Code

C Enter 2 with the Number keys.

A Press the {User Tools}key.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

D Select [Single] or [All] with the [←],

[→], {~}, or {}}key.

Tint

TPES250N

B Enter 6 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

TPES530E

E Press the [OK] key.

C Enter 4 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

If you selected [Single

]

A Keep pressing the [→] or {}}

key to display the number of

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS

D Keep pressing the [→] or {}}key B Enter 6 with the Number keys.

to display your user code.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

C Enter 5 with the Number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {Enter}key.

TPES570E

E Press the [OK] key.

F Enter the new user code with the

Number keys.

D Keep pressing the [→] or {}}key

Program

Clear Modes

to display your user code.

Auto Cycle

Proof

Enter

Start

Clear/Stop

TPES040N

TPES570E

G Press the [OK] key.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Press the [Yes] key.

6-5 Del. User Code

A Press the {User Tools}key.

User Tools

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Overlay

Tint

TPES250N

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. What To Do If Something

Goes Wrong

If Your Machine Does Not Operate As You

Want

If a malfunction or a misfeed occurs within the machine, the following messages

will appear on the panel display.

Message

Meaning

Drum unit is not set.

Set Drum unit.

Make sure that the drum is completely set in position.

Max. quantity: ****

Min. quantity: ****

The number of prints exceeds the maximum print

quantity.

You can change the maximum number of prints that

can be made in one operation with the user tools. See

“Max. Quantity” in ⇒ P.136 “2. Set Operation Modes”.

The number of prints does not exceed the minimum

print quantity.

You can change the minimum number of prints that

can be made in one operation with the user tools. See

“Min. Quantity” in ⇒ P.136 “2. Set Operation Modes”.

Set original.

Make prints after you confirm whether there is an

original or a command sheet on the exposure glass

(contact glass).

Set command sheet.

Make sure that you have changed the original on the

exposure glass (contact glass) before pressing the

{

Start}key.

Size of original and paper is

not same.

Set a paper size that matches the reproduction ratio

you have selected and your original.

The reproduction ratio selected by Auto Magnifica-

tion Selection mode is too big or too small.

Note

❒ You can make prints if you press the {Start}key.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

-When a service call message is displayed in the panel display

Press the [Exit] key. Then turn the main switch off and on. If a service code ap-

pears again, contact your service representative.

Note

❒ If a service code appears on the panel display after you turn the main switch

off and on a few times, do not continue turning it on and off. Leave the ma-

chine off.

❒ When you make masters continuously using originals with solid images, SC-

03-03 tends to appear on the panel display. In this case, turn off the main

switch and wait for a while. Then turn on the main switch.

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If You Cannot Make Prints As You Want

Problem

Cause

Action

Misfeeds occur frequently. Improper paper type is se- Select proper paper type.

lected with the [Ppr. Type

key.

]

See ⇒ P.42 “Printing On

Various Kinds Of Paper”.

When you try to set several Some functions cannot be See ⇒ P.198 “Combination

functions at a time, you

used together.

Chart”.

cannot set some functions.

Parts of the image are not Erase margin is too wide.

Set a narrower erase mar-

gin with the user tools. See

⇒ P.150 “3-9 Margin Erase

Area”.

printed in Edge Erase

Edge margins of original

mode.

are too narrow.

Prints are blank or parts of The paper feed side/end

Make sure that the paper

the image are not printed. plates are not set correctly. feed side/end plates touch

the paper lightly.

Combine Originals Mode

Problem

Cause

Action

Prints are blank or parts of Original size and direction You cannot use originals of

the image are not printed. are not correct.

different sizes and direc-

tions in Combine Originals

mode. Use originals of

same size and direction.

Print image is not correct. Original set order is not

correct.

Set originals face up into

the optional document

feeder. The first original

should be on the top.

Set original face down on

the exposure glass (contact

glass). The first original

should be set first.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

x Clearing Misfeeds

RCAUTION:

• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach

inside the machine to remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.

• Did you select appropriate paper

Note

type with the [Ppr. Type] key?

❒ After clearing the misfeeds, make

sure that all the doors, covers, and

units are closed and the x indica-

tor is off.

❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave

any torn scraps of paper, originals,

or masters in the machine.

TPES520E

❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not

turn off the main switch. If you do

your print settings will be cleared.

• Are the side plate pads in the cor-

rect positions?

❒ If misfeeds occur repeatedly, con-

tact your service representative.

”

+ A” Paper Misfeed In The

Paper Feed Section

A Remove the misfed paper.

TPEY060E

To print on thin paper (47.1 g/m²,

12.5 lb), slide the levers (behind the

paper feed side/end plates) in the

direction of the arrow (see illustra-

tion).

• When paper is curled, correct the

curl as shown.

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

Check the following before restarting

the printing run.

Z066

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clearing Misfeeds

• When paper edges stick together

or paper is not fed to the machine,

shuffle the paper as shown.

B Lower drum unit lock lever B1.

C Take out the drum.

Z067

• When you use postcards or thick

paper, lower the printing speed to

setting 1 or 2. See ⇒ P.28 “Chang-

ing The Printing Speed”.

Speed

Combine

Class

Slow

Fast

Note

❒ For how to take out the drum

unit, see ⇒ P.87 “Changing The

Color Drum Unit”.

TPES100N

• When a multi-feed occurs or the

paper is skewed, make sure that

the paper feed side/end plates are

properly adjusted. When you load

paper on the paper feed tray, make

sure that the paper edge touches

the back fence and paper is placed

on the proper paper size scale.

Only use paper where the leading

edge has two right angle corners.

D Pull out the misfed paper gently

from the inside.

E If you cannot remove the misfed

paper, remove paper from the pa-

per feed tray.

”

+ A + B” Paper Misfeed In

The Paper Feed Section

A Open the front door.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

Note

F Set the drum unit and close the

front door.

❒ For how to take out the drum

unit, see ⇒ P.87 “Changing The

Color Drum Unit”.

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

D While pressing the drum lock,

grasp the edge of the master (the

white area) and peel it off.

See ⇒ P.168 “”x + A” Paper Misfeed In

The Paper Feed Section”.

”

+ B” Paper Or Master

Wrapped Around The Drum

When The Master Is Wrapped Around

The Drum

E Return the drum lock to its origi-

nal position.

F Set the drum unit and close the

A Open the front door.

front door.

B Lower drum unit lock lever B1.

When Paper Is Wrapped Around The

Drum

A Open the front cover.

B Lower drum unit lock lever B1.

C Take out the drum.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clearing Misfeeds

C Take out the drum.

B Lower drum unit lock lever B1.

C Take out the drum.

Note

❒ For how to take out the drum

unit, see ⇒ P.87 “Changing The

Color Drum Unit”.

D Remove the misfed paper from

the drum.

Note

❒ For how to take out the drum

unit, see ⇒ P.87 “Changing The

Color Drum Unit”.

D Remove the misfed paper from

the inside as shown in the illus-

tration.

E If you cannot find misfed paper

in step D, remove misfed paper

from the pressure cylinder.

F Set the drum unit and close the

front door.

When Paper Is Misfed Inside The

Machine

E If you cannot remove the misfed

paper, remove paper from the

pressure cylinder.

A Open the front cover.

F Set the drum unit and close the

front door.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

If the paper is curled or the original's

leading edge margin is too narrow,

the following action is necessary.

• When you use curled paper, cor-

rect the curl as shown.

* = Less than 10 mm, 0.4"

Z066

”

+ C” Paper Misfeed In The

• If you cannot correct the paper

curl, stack the paper with the curl

face down as shown.

Paper Exit Section

A Slowly but firmly pull out the

misfed paper.

TPEY090E

• When the leading edge margin of

the original is less than 10 mm, 0.4"

or there is a solid image on the

leading edge, insert the original

with the widest margin first or

make a leading edge margin by

making a copy.

When a thin paper misfeed in the pa-

per exit section occurs, reduce the

printing speed with the {Speed}keys.

(See ⇒ P.28 “Changing The Printing

Speed”.) If you cannot reduce the

printing speed, close the trailing edge

guides or move the end plate toward

the paper delivery tray edge.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clearing Misfeeds

tion until the master edge reaches

the arrow mark.

”

+ D” Master Misfeed In

The Master Feed Section

A Pull out the master feed unit until

it stops.

B Open the master guide.

H Close the master guide.

C Open the master feed unit cover

(1).

I Push in the master feed unit until

D Remove the master roll (2).

it stops.

”

+ D + B” Master Misfeed In

The Master Feed Section

A Open the front door.

E Reset the master roll (1).

B Lower drum unit look lever B1.

Note

❒ The master roll must be posi-

tioned as shown in the illustra-

tion in step F.

F Close the master feed unit cover

(2).

G Insert the paper edge of the mas-

ter roll as shown in the illustra-

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

C Take out the drum.

Note

D Pull out the misfed master from

the inside.

❒ For how to take out the drum

unit, see ⇒ P.87 “Changing The

Color Drum Unit”.

D If you find a misfed master on the

drum unit, grasp the edge of the

master (the white area) and peel it

off while pressing the drum lock.

E Set the drum unit and close the

front door.

”

+ B + E” Master Misfeed in

The Master Eject Section

E Return the drum lock to its origi-

A Open the front door.

nal position.

B Lower drum unit lock lever B1.

F Grasp handle E1 and pull out the

master eject unit until it stops.

E 1

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clearing Misfeeds

G Pull out lever E3 and remove the D Return the master eject unit to its

misfed master.

original position and close the

front door.

”

+ P” Original Misfeed

Occurs When Using The

Optional Document Feeder

A Open the ADF cover.

H Return lever E3 and the master

eject unit to their original posi-

tion.

TPEH210E

I Set the drum unit and close the

front door.

B Pull out the misfed original gen-

tly.

”

+ E” Master Misfeed In The

Master Eject Section

A Open the front door.

B Grasp handle E1 and pull out the

master eject unit until it stops.

TPEH212E

C If you cannot remove misfed orig-

inal in step B, open the document

feeder.

E 1

C Check where the misfed master

is. Remove the misfed master.

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

• Curled, folded, or creased origi-

nals

D Pull the green knob towards you

and remove the misfed original.

• Originals with any kind of coating,

such as thermal fax paper, art pa-

per, aluminum foil, carbon paper,

or conductive paper

• Bound originals such as books

• Damaged originals

• Originals with glue on them

• Pasted originals

TPEH220E

• Originals written in pencil

E Return the document feed sheet

• Thin originals that have low stiff-

ness

to its original position.

• Originals with index tabs

• Translucent paper

F Close the ADF cover until it clicks

in position and if necessary, close

the document feeder.

Note

❒ Do not mix different sizes of origi-

nals in the optional document

feeder.

❒ Remove staples or clips of origi-

nals. Fan originals that have had

staples or clip removed.

❒ Do not stack originals above the

TPEH211E

limit mark.

-To prevent original misfeeds:

Set the following kinds of originals on

the exposure glass (contact glass).

• Originals heavier than 105 g/m²,

27 lb

• Originals lighter than 52 g/m², 14

• Originals smaller than 105 mm ×

128 mm, 4.2" × 5.1"

• Originals larger than 297 mm × 864

mm, 11.6" × 33.8"

• Stapled or clipped originals

• Perforated or torn originals

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When The Open Cover/Unit Indicator (

) Lights

When The Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M)

Lights

MMake sure that the following door/

cover are closed.

❖

Front Door

Close the front door completely.

TPEH070E

❖

Document Feeder Cover (Option)

Close the document feeder cover

until it locks in position.

TPEH211E

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

When The Add Ink Indicator (j) Lights

The Add Ink indicator (j) lights when it is time to supply ink.

RCAUTION:

• If ink comes into contact with your eyes, rinse immediately in run-

ning water. In the case of any abnormal symptoms, consult a

doctor.

RCAUTION:

• Keep the ink or ink container out of reach of children.

RCAUTION:

• If ink is ingested, force vomiting by drinking a strong saline solu-

tion and consult a doctor immediately.

RCAUTION:

• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's

parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these

specified supplies.

Note

❒ Ink is readily removed from skin by waterless hand cleaners followed by

washing with soap and water.

❒ Be careful not to get any ink on your clothing.

❒ Store ink under low temperature and humidity conditions.

❒ Do not store ink where it will be exposed to heat or direct sunlight.

❒ Store on a flat surface.

A Open the front door.

B Pull out the ink holder.

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When The Add Ink Indicator (

) Lights

C Remove the used ink cartridge.

D Remove the cap of the new ink cartridge.

E Insert the new cartridge into the ink holder.

Note

❒ Always supply ink of the same color.

F Return the ink holder to its original position until it clicks.

G Close the front door.

The machine will start idling to supply ink to the drum.

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

When The Master End Indicator (C) Lights

The Master End indicator (C) lights when it is time to replace the master roll or

when you need to set the master roll.

RCAUTION:

• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's

parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these

specified supplies.

A Pull out the master feed unit until it stops.

B Open the master guide.

C Open the master feed unit cover (1).

D Remove the used master roll (2).

Note

❒ When the Master End indicator is lit, it is necessary to replace the master

roll even if some master remains on the old roll.

E The new master roll must be positioned as shown in the illustration (1).

F Close the master feed unit cover (2).

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When The Master End Indicator (

) Lights

G Insert the paper edge of the master roll as shown in the illustration until the

master edge reaches the arrow mark.

H Close the master guide.

I Push in the master feed unit until it stops.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

When The Master Eject Indicator (k)

Lights

The Master Eject indicator (k) lights

F Remove the used master by push-

when it is time to empty the master

eject unit or when you need to set the

master eject unit.

ing down the master eject unit up-

per handle towards the trash box

(2).

Note

❒ Ink is readily removed from skin

by waterless hand cleaners fol-

lowed by washing with soap and

water.

❒ Be careful not to get any ink on

your clothing while emptying the

master eject unit.

Note

❒ If you cannot remove the used

masters completely, repeat step

F until all the masters are re-

moved.

A Prepare the trash box.

B Open the front door.

C Grasp handle E1 and pull out the

G Reinstall the master eject unit un-

master eject unit until it stops.

til it clicks in position.

H Close the front cover.

E 1

D Pull up handle E2 and pull out the

master eject unit completely.

E 1

E Grasp the master eject unit upper

handle and turn it clockwise with

one hand while holding handle

E1 with other hand (1).

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When Other Indicators Are Lit

Indicator

Meaning and action

The key counter (option) is not set. Insert the key counter.

TPES270E

• (Metric version)

Color drum unit is installed.

A3 A4

TPES280E

•

(Inch version)

8¹/²Color

TPES280N

• (Metric version)

A3/11" × 17" drum unit is set.

A3 A4

TPES290E

• (Inch version)

Drum

17 8¹/²Co

TPES290N

A4/8¹/₂" × 11" drum unit is set.

• (Metric version)

A3 A4

TPES300E

• (Inch version)

Drum

17 8¹/²Co

TPES300N

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

When The Prints Are Not Delivered In A

Neat Stack

If you use small size paper, prints

might not be delivered in a neat stack.

In this case, follow the steps below.

A Lower the end plate a little. While

holding the end plate, lift the an-

gle adjustment screw.

TPEH320E

B Adjust the end plate angle by

turning the screw clockwise or

counterclockwise.

TPEH240E

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Poor Printing

Dirty Background

If the background of prints is dirty, the drum unit is dirty.

Z091

RCAUTION:

• If ink comes into contact with your eyes, rinse immediately in run-

ning water. In the case of any abnormal symptoms, consult a

doctor.

RCAUTION:

• Keep the ink or ink container out of reach of children.

RCAUTION:

• If ink is ingested, force vomiting by drinking a strong saline solu-

tion and consult a doctor immediately.

Note

❒ When you use paper smaller than the original image, select the proper reduc-

tion ratio. Otherwise, you might get dirty background prints.

❒ When you use postcards and the like, the background might be dirty because

postcards do not absorb ink well. In this case, lower the printing speed or use

Skip Feed mode to dry the ink on the prints.

A Turn off the main switch.

TPEH020E

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

B Pull out the drum unit.

TPEH101E

Note

❒ For how to take out the drum unit, see ⇒ P.87 “Changing The Color Drum

Unit”.

C While pressing the drum lock, turn the drum until you can see the trailing

edge of the master.

TPEH370E

D With a dry soft cloth, remove any ink that has accumulated on the trailing

edge of the drum unit.

TPEH380E

Important

❒ Do not use benzine, thinner, or other organic liquids. Otherwise, this ma-

chine might be damaged.

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Poor Printing

E Insert the drum unit until it locks in position, then lower the drum unit

lock lever.

TPEH091E

F Close the front door.

G Turn on the main switch.

TPEH021E

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong

Reference

See ⇒ P.87 “Changing The Color

Drum Unit”.

Black Line/Stain

Check the platen cover and clean it if

dirty. See ⇒ P.196 “Platen Cover”.

Check the exposure glass (contact

glass) and clean it if dirty. See ⇒ P.196

“Exposure glass (contact glass)”.

B While pressing the drum lock,

grasp the edge of the master

(white part of the master) and

peel it off.

Check the sheet of the optional docu-

ment feeder and clean it if dirty. See

⇒ P.197 “Sheet”.

Note

❒ When black lines or stains still ap-

pear on prints even if you clean the

above, contact your service repre-

sentative.

TPEH200E

C Return the drum lock to its origi-

Skipped Prints

nal position.

If the machine is not used for a long

period of time or you change the color

drum unit, the ink on the drum might

dry causing print quality to deterio-

rate. To solve this problem, use Qual-

ity Start Mode. See ⇒ P.76 “Quality

Start Mode— Regaining The Image Den-

sity When The Ink On The Drum Dries”.

D Set the drum unit until it clicks in

position and close the front cover.

When you get skipped print images

even if you use Quality Start mode,

perform the following procedure.

TPEH091E

A Open the front cover and pull out

the drum unit.

TPEH101E

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. REMARKS

Operation Notes

General Cautions

• While printing, do not turn off the main switch.

• While printing, do not open the door or covers.

• While printing, do not unplug the power cord.

• While printing, do not move the machine.

• Keep corrosive liquids, such as acid, off the machine.

• Open and close the door and covers softly.

• Do not put anything except originals or command sheets on the machine.

• When opening or closing the door or covers, keep hold of them so they don't

full.

• Always turn the machine off when you have finished printing for the day.

• If the machine must be transported by vehicle, please contact your service

representative.

• Make sure to make a few trial prints to check the image position because the

image position of the trial print might not correspond with that of the origi-

nal.

• If the image registration is not consistent, slow the printing speed down to

setting 1 or 2.

• When performing duplex or multicolored printing, leave the printed paper

for a while before the next printing in order to let the ink dry on the printed

paper. If this is not done, feed roller marks will appear on the print image.

• When the machine is used in low temperature conditions, the image density

might decrease. In this case, slow the printing speed down to setting 1 or 2.

• When making duplex prints, misdetection of paper wrapping might occur if

the paper delivery sensor detects a black area at the leading edge of the back

side. Keep at least an 10 mm, 0.4" margin at the leading edge of the back side

of the printing paper.

• Press the {Proof} key to perform a test print as the first few prints might be

light.

• When making duplex prints or when using non-white printing paper, the pa-

per size detection sensors might malfunction and some part of the image

might not appear on the print. In this case, place a blank sheet under the print-

ing paper on the paper feed tray.

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

• When making duplex prints or when using non-white printing paper, the pa-

per end sensor might malfunction and fail to detect the paper. In this case,

place a blank sheet under the printing paper on the paper feed tray.

• The outer portion of the image might not be printed under low temperature.

In this case, slow the printing speed down to setting 1 or 2, or increase the

room temperature.

• The paper exit pawl might contact the printing paper and cause black lines on

the prints. In this case, increase the printing speed or make a new master with

lighter image density mode.

• The leading edge of the prints might become stained if the edge touches the

image of prints on the paper delivery tray.

• The ink of the print on the paper delivery tray might stick to the back side of

the next print.

• When the machine is on and the power source is less than 90 % of the speci-

fied amount, printing quality will decrease. Therefore, make sure the supply

from your electrical outlet is at least 90 % of the required amount.

• As various kinds and qualities of paper exist, some paper might be wrapped

around the drum or cause misfeeds.

• If your hands are stained with ink:

• Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin.

• Cleanse skin thoroughly after contact, before breaks and meals, and at the

end of the work period.

• Ink is readily removed from skin by waterless hand cleaners followed by

washing with soap and water.

• Also, be careful not to get any ink on your clothing while emptying the master

eject unit or while loading a new ink cartridge.

• The image density varies according to the printing speed and the room tem-

perature. So, adjust the printing speed or increase the room temperature.

• When you make a lot of prints from a small image, ink might ooze out from

the edges of the master, especially under high temperature and when print-

ing in two or more colors. In this case, make a new master.

• Use ink made within one year. Ink stored for a long period tends to dry slow-

ly and yield lower image density.

• While making a master, do not leave the platen cover or optional document

feeder open.

• When you store 1,000 ml/pack ink, make sure to store it upright with the cap

pointing up.

• If you use originals of letters in Light or Dark Tone function, edges of the let-

ters might be printed clearly and inside of the letters might become screened

image.

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation Notes

• When you use originals with light lettering, edges of the letters might be

printed clearly and the inside of the letters might be light. In this case, in-

crease the image density.

• When you use originals of fine letters, letters on prints might be skipped. In

this case, increase the image density or use Letter mode.

• Up to 1,000 sheets of paper can be delivered to the paper delivery tray. How-

ever, if 500 or more sheets of paper are delivered to the paper delivery tray,

the leading edge of the prints might become stained.

• When you use envelope or pasted print paper, the leading edge of print might

be damaged.

• When the machine is used in low temperature conditions, the printing area

might become small.

Print Paper

• When you use non-standard paper, some parts of the image might not appear

on the print. In this case, set the machine not to detect paper size with the user

tools. See “Ignore Paper Size” in ⇒ P.139 “4. Mode Setting”.

• When the paper is curled, stack the paper with the curl face down, otherwise

the paper might wrap around the drum or stains might appear.

• Postcards and the like do not absorb ink well. Offset images might appear on

the rear side of subsequent prints. Solid image originals will cause offset im-

age prints.

Originals

• If there is no margin or if there is a solid image area near the leading edge of

the original, make at least a 10 mm, 0.4", margin at the leading edge; other-

wise, the paper might wrap around the drum or the paper exit pawl might be-

come dirty and cause black lines on prints.

• If you use originals that have bold letters or solid images at the leading edges,

you might get prints with dirty edges. In this case, insert the widest margin

first, or raise the printing speed.

Misfed Paper

• When printing a large solid area on A3, 11" × 17" paper, the sides of the print

tend to curl up after the print is fed out to the paper delivery tray. The next

sheet that feeds out pushes against the curled sheet and a paper misfeed oc-

curs. In this case, slow the printing speed down (setting 1 or 2).

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

PC Controller

Important

❒ Make sure that m indicator on the PC controller operation panel is off before

unplugging the power cord.

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Where To Put Your Machine

Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental con-

ditions greatly affect its performance.

Environmental Conditions

Optimum environmental conditions

RWARNING:

• Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water

(e.g. vases, flowerpots, glasses) on the machine. If the con-

tents fall inside the machine, a fire or electric shock could

occur.

RCAUTION:

• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an elec-

tric shock might occur.

• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it top-

ples over, it could cause injury.

RCAUTION:

• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a

continuous air turnover.

RCAUTION:

• After you move the machine, fix it with the caster fixture. Other-

wise, the machine might move or come down to cause a personal

injury.

• Temperature: 10 – 30°C, 50 – 86°F

• Humidity: 20 – 90 % RH

• A strong and level base (a sturdy desk and cabinet etc.).

• The machine must be level within 5 mm, ¹³/₆₄" both front to rear and left to

right.

• Be sure to locate this machine in a large well ventilated room that has an air

turnover of more than 30 m³/hr/person.

Environments to avoid

• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1500 lux).

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air

from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation with-

in the machine.)

• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.

• Dusty areas.

• Areas with corrosive gases.

Power connection

RWARNING:

• Only connect the machine to the power source described on

the inside front cover of this manual.

• Avoid multi-wiring.

• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the pow-

er cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend

it more than necessary. These actions could cause an elec-

tric shock or fire.

• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet.

Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

RWARNING:

• Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely ac-

cessible so that in event of an emergency it can be un-

plugged easily.

RCAUTION:

• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.

• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the

power cord.

RCAUTION:

• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid

damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.

Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

Access to machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Where To Put Your Machine

❖

Main Frame

GRINST0E

1. More than 10 cm, 4.0"

2. More than 60 cm, 23.7"

3. More than 60 cm, 23.7"

4. More than 60 cm, 23.7"

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

Maintaining Your Machine

To maintain high print quality, clean

B Clean the platen cover with a

the following parts and units regular-

ly.

damp cloth and wipe it with a dry

cloth.

Important

❒ Do not use benzine, thinner, or

other organic liquids. Otherwise,

this machine might be damaged.

Main Frame

AM1P0100

Exposure glass (contact glass)

Note

A Lift the platen cover or document

❒ If you do not clean the platen

cover, marks on the cover will

be printed.

feeder.

B Clean the exposure glass (contact

glass) with a damp cloth and wipe

it with a dry cloth.

Paper feed roller (paper feed tray)

A Wipe off the paper dust on the pa-

per feed roller with a damp cloth,

then wipe it with a dry cloth.

TPEH390E

Note

❒ If you do not clean the exposure

glass (contact glass), marks on

the glass will be printed.

TPEH120E

Note

❒ If you do not clean the paper

feed roller, paper misfeeds tend

to occur.

Platen Cover

A Lift the platen cover.

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintaining Your Machine

Optional Document Feeder

Sheet

A Lift the document feeder.

B Clean the sheet with a damp cloth

and wipe it with a dry cloth.

AM1D600

Note

❒ If you do not clean the sheet,

marks on the sheet will be print-

ed.

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

Combination Chart

This combination chart shows which modes can be used together.

✩

means that these modes can be used together.

means that these modes cannot be used together.

means that these modes cannot be used together. Function to be

specified later takes priority.

means that these modes cannot be used together. Function specified

earlier takes priority.

means that these modes can be used together. You cannot cancel

Economy mode after selecting On Line mode.

Function to be specified later

Letter, Photo, Let- --

ter/Photo, Pencil

mode

✩

*1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

✩

Economy mode

Tint mode

✩

-- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

-- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

✩

Auto Cycle

Preset Reduce/En- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

large, Zoom

AutoMagnification ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ ✩ *1

Selection

Directional Magni- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

fication (%)

Directional Magni- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

fication (size)

Combine Originals ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 ✩ ✩ *1

(2 Images on one

sheet)

Combine Originals ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 ✩ ✩ *1

(4 Images on one

sheet)

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combination Chart

Function to be specified later

Memory Combine ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2

mode (4 Originals)

✩

Memory Combine ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2

mode (8 Originals)

Memory Combine ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2

mode (16 Originals)

Edge Erase

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

All Class mode

Auto Class mode ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

Manual Class mode ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

Class mode

Job Separation

Overlay

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

✩

Form

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

Stamping Date

Page Stamping

Stamping mode

User Stamping

Repeat

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ✩ *1

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2

-- ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ✩ *1

✩

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 ✩ ✩ -- *2 *2 ✩ ✩ *1

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 ✩ ✩ *2 -- *2 ✩ ✩ *1

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 -- *2

*2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 --

✩

Make-up

✩

Skip Feed

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ --

On Line

✩

*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

✩

Image Rotation

Master Saving

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- -- -- -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ --

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

This page is intentionally blank.

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. SPECIFICATIONS

Main Frame

❖

Configuration:

Desk top

Printing Process:

Full automatic one drum system

Original Type:

Sheet/Book

Original Size:

Maximum 304.8 mm × 432 mm, 12.0" × 17.0"

Pixel Density:

400 dpi

Image Mode:

Photo mode (Sand pattern)

Letter mode (Standard mode)

Letter/Photo mode

Pencil mode

Tint mode

❖

Reduction Ratios:

• Inch version:

93 %, 77 %, 74 %, 65 %

• Metric version:

93 %, 87 %, 82 %, 71 %

Enlargement Ratios:

• Inch version:

155 %, 129 %, 121 %

• Metric version:

141 %, 122 %, 115 %

❖

Zoom:

From 50 % to 200 % in 1 % steps

Directional Magnification:

• Vertical:

From 50 % to 200 % in 1 % steps

• Horizontal:

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

From 50 % to 200 % in 1 % steps

❖

Printing Area:

• A3 drum:

• Inch version: More than 290 × 419 mm, 11.4" × 16.4"

• Metric version: More than 290 mm × 409 mm, 11.4" × 16.1"

• A4 drum:

More than 290 mm × 200 mm, 11.4" × 7.8"

❖

Print Paper Size:

Maximum 297 mm × 432 mm, 11.6" × 17.0"

Minimum 70 mm × 148 mm, 2.8" × 5.9"

❖

Leading Edge Margin:

Less than 10 mm, 0.4"

Print Paper Weight:

47.1 g/m²to 209.3 g/m², 12.5 lb to 55.6 lb

Print Speed:

60 – 120 rpm (5 steps)

First Copy Time (Master Process Time):

Less than 15.5 seconds (A3, 11" × 17"L)

Less than 12 seconds (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11"K)

❖

Second Copy Time (First Print Time):

Less than 18.5 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")

Less than 15 seconds (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11")

❖

Color Printing:

Drum unit replacement system (red, blue, green, and brown)

Image Position:

• Vertical:

• Inch version: ± 10 mm, ± 0.4"

• Metric version: ± 15 mm, ± 0.6"

• Side:

± 10 mm, ± 0.4" (for either side)

❖

Paper Feed Tray Capacity:

1,000 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

Paper Delivery Tray Capacity:

1,000 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main Frame

❖

Master Eject Unit Capacity:

• A3 drum

More than 60 masters

• A4 drum

90 masters

Dimensions (W

× H):

Width

Depth

Height

Stored

625 mm, 24.6"

650 mm, 25.6"

575 mm, 22"

Stored with docu-

ment feeder

684 mm, 26.9"

Set up

1,405 mm, 55.4"

650 mm, 25.6"

575 mm, 22"

Set up with cabinet 1,405 mm, 55.4"

1,010 mm, 39.8"

1,120 mm, 44.1"

Set up with cabinet 1,215 mm, 47.8"

and document feed-

er (when you use

A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" or

smaller paper)

Set up with cabinet 1,405 mm, 55.4"

and document feed-

er (when you use

B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or

650 mm, 25.6"

1.120 mm, 44.1"

larger paper)

❖

Weight:

• Machine:

Less than 94 kg, 207 lb

❖

Noise Emission:

Sound pressure level: The measurement are to be made according to ISO 7779

at operator position.

Printing Speed

60 rpm

57 dB

60 dB

64 dB

90 rpm

120 rpm

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

❖

Noise Emission:

Sound power level: The measurements are made according to ISO 7779.

Printing Speed

60 rpm

71 dB

74 dB

77 dB

90 rpm

120 rpm

❖

Power Source:

See the inside front cover of this manual.

❖

Power Consumption:

• Master Making:

Less than 0.3 kW

• Printing:

Less than 0.28 kW

Optional Equipment:

• Drum unit: Color Drums

(A3, 11" × 17") - red, blue, green, and brown

(A4, 8¹/₂" × 11") - black, red, blue, green, and brown

• Key Counter

• Cabinet

• Document Feeder

• Memory Board

• PC Controller

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Document Feeder

❖

Original Type:

Sheet

Original Weight:

40.7 g/m²to 127.9 g/m², 10.8 lb to 34 lb

Original Size:

Max. 297 mm × 864 mm, 11.6" × 33.8"

Min. 105 mm × 128 mm, 4.2" × 5.1"

❖

First Copy Time (Master Process Time):

Less than 19.5 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")

Less than 16 seconds (A4, 8¹/₂× 11")

Second Copy Time (First Print Time):

Less than 22.5 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")

Less than 19 seconds (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11")

Original Capacity:

30 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

4.5 mm, 0.17" height

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

Consumables

Name

Size

Remarks

Master:

Length: 110 m, 410 ft/roll

A3 drum

Width: 420 mm, 16.5" 2 Rolls/case

More than 200 masters can

be made per roll

A4 drum

330 masters can be made

per roll

Ink-Black

1,000 ml/pack, 600 ml/pack, 5 packs/case Environmental conditions:

-5 to 40°C 10 – 95 % RH

Ink-Red

1,000 ml/pack, 5 packs/case

Ink-Blue

Ink-Green

Ink-Brown 1,000 ml/pack, 5 packs/case

Note

❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

16 One-sided Originals → 1 One-sided

Print Of 16 Images, 124

Cancel, 9

Cancel Comb., 141

1 One-sided Originals → 1 One-sided

Print Of 2 Images, 68

1 One-sided Originals → 1 One-sided

Print Of 4 Images, 68

2 One-sided Originals → 1 One-sided

Print Of 2 Images, 63

2 One-sided Originals → 1 One-sided

Print Of 4 Images, 63

4 One-sided Originals → 1 One-sided

Print Of 4 Images, 124

Caution, iii

Changing The Paper Size , 23

Changing The Printing Speed, 28

Check Counter, 146, 162

Chg. User Code, 147, 163

Class Enter No., 138, 149

Class}key, 7

Class Manual Set, 139

Class Mode, 61

{

Clear Modes}key, 7

Clear/Stop}key, 7

8 One-sided Originals → 1 One-sided

Print Of 8 Images, 124

closed area method, 102

Color Drum, 87, 183

Color Drum indicator, 8

Color Printing, 87

Combination Chart, 198

Combine, 140

Symbols

{~}{}}{|}, 7

, 168

x Clearing Misfeeds

{

Combine}key, 6

Combine Originals, 63

A3/11" × 17" Drum indicator, 8

A3/11" × 17" drum unit, 183

A4/81/2" × 11" Drum indicator, 8

A4/81/2" × 11" drum unit, 183

Accessing The User Tools, 133

Access to machine, 194

Add Ink Indicator (j), 178

Adjusting Print Image Density, 26

Adjusting Print Image Position , 25

All Class Mode, 51

Combine Originals Printing With The

Document Feeder, 83

Combining Originals Into One Print , 63

Combining Originals Into One Print With

The Memory Board, 124

Comb. Sep. Line, 140

Command sheet, 98

Contact Glass, 3

Copy Count Display, 137

Counter

, 8

Auto Class Mode, 53

Auto Combine Mode, 68

Auto Cycle, 49

Data Print, 136

Date Position Set, 145

Date Style Set, 145

{

Auto Cycle}key, 7

Auto Cycle ON/OFF, 139

Auto Magnification Selection, 32

Auto Online, 136

Auto Quality Start, 76

Auto Reset, 135

Auto Rotation, 143

Auto Separate, 142

Deflector Angle, 142

Del. User Code, 147, 164

Density (User), 145

diagonal line method, 101

Directional Magnification, 37

Direction (Page), 146

Dirty Background, 185

Display Panel Layout, 10

Drum Size, 90

Background ON/OFF, 140

Background Patterns, 96

Black Line/Stain, 188

Drum Unit, 3

Drum Unit Lock Lever B1, 3

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Economy Mode, 48

Language on LCD, 135

LCD Contrast, 137

Letter mode, 45

{

Economy Mode}key, 6

Edge Erase, 40

{

Edge Erase}key, 6

Enter}key, 7

Letter/Photo Mode Printing, 46

Loading Paper, 15

Envelopes, 43

Longer Paper, 140

Environmental Conditions, 193

Erasing Edge Margins, 40

Exit, 9

Machine Exterior, 1

Machine Interior, 2

Exposure Glass, 3

Main Switch, 2

Maintaining Your Machine, 196

Make/Chg. Pattern, 146, 161

Flip-up Cover, 1

Form, 113

Make-up Printin g Features , 93

Make-Up}key, 6

Front Door, 1

Make-up Printing, 105

Make-up Printing With The Optional

Document Feeder, 107

Make-up Samples, 110

Making Master And Prints At One Stroke,

Manual Class , 142

Manual Class Mode With 2 Or More

Originals , 58

Halftone Printing, 27

Having Images Repeated On One Print ,

Having Page Numbers Stamped On Your

Prints, 117

Having The Date Stamped On Your

Prints, 115

Having The Machine Choose The

Reproduction Ratios, 32

Manual Class Mode With 2 Or More

Originals Using The Document Feeder ,

Manual Class Mode With One Original ,

Manual Quality Start, 76

Margin Erase Area, 139, 150

Master, 180

Idling for Q.start, 141

Ignore Paper Size, 139

{

Image Density}key, 6

Master Cut Length, 143

Master Eject Indicator (k), 182

Master Eject Unit Front Handle E1, 3

Master End Indicator (C), 180

Master Feed Unit, 1

Master Misfeed In The Master Eject

Section, 174 , 175

Master Misfeed In The Master Feed

Section, 173

Image Overlay, 113

Image Rotation, 91

Indicators, 8

Initial Setting, 137

Ink, 178

Ink Holder, 3

Ink/Master Left, 143

Max. Quantity, 136

memory board, 91, 93, 113, 115, 117, 120,

122, 124

Job Separation, 77

{

Job Separator}key, 6

Memory Combine, 124

Merging Images, 113

Min. Quantity, 136

mm/inch, 135

Mode Setting, 139

key counter, 183

Key Operator Code, 147

Keys, 6

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitors, 8

MSTR Makg. Density, 137

Pencil Mode Printing, 47

Photo (Lightness), 138

Photo Mode Printing, 45

Photo (Screen), 138

Platen Cover, 3

Poor Printing, 185

Next, 9

No. of Q.start, 141, 152

No. of Skip Feed, 141, 151

No Orig. Size, 139

No Orig. Size (ADF), 139

Number keys, 7

Position (Date), 145, 158

Position (Page), 146, 160

Position (User), 145, 156

Power connection, 194

Preset Reduce/Enlarge , 30

Prev., 9

Printing In Two Colors, 88

Printing Paper, 11

Printing Preset Messages On Your Prints ,

OK, 9

Ppr. Size, 139

120

{

On Line}key, 6

Printing Secret Documents , 75

Printing Your Own Messages On Your

Prints, 122

On Line Overlay, 113

On Line Printing, 80

Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M), 177

Operation Panel, 1, 6

Optional Document Feeder, 81

Options, 4

Original Misfeed, 175

Original Priority, 137

Originals, 13, 81

Print}key, 7

Program, 72

Program}key, 7

Proof}key, 7

Protecting A Program, 73

Overlay, 113

{

Overlay}key, 6

Quality Start}key, 6

Quality Start Mode, 76

Page Stamping, 117

Panel Beeper, 137

Panel Display, 8, 9

R. Counter Display, 135

Recalling A Program, 73

Reducing And Enlarging In 1 % Steps , 35

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset

Ratios, 30

Regaining The Image Density , 76

Reg/Chg KeyOpCode, 147

Regist. (User), 145, 158

Reg. User Code, 147

REMARKS, 189

Removing Program Protection, 74

Repeat, 129

Repeating An Image Over The En tire

Print, 124

Replenishing Paper, 22

Reproduction Ratio, 138 , 148

Reset Counters, 147, 163

Reset R. Counter, 135

Paper Alignment Wing Knobs, 2

Paper Alignment Wings, 2

Paper Delivery End Plate, 2

Paper Delivery End Plate Knob, 2

Paper Delivery Side Plate Knobs, 3

Paper Delivery Side Plates, 3

Paper Delivery Tray, 2

Paper Feed Side/End Plate Knob, 1

Paper Feed Side/End Plates, 1

Paper Feed Tray , 1

Paper Feed Tray Down key, 1

Paper Misfeed In The Paper Exit Section ,

172

Paper Misfeed In The Pape r Feed Section ,

168, 169

Paper Or Master Wrapped Around The

Drum, 170

Paper Type, 137

Restricted Access, 147

Rotating Original Images, 91

PC controller, 80, 113

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety Information, i

Saving Ink, 48

User Code, 146

User Codes, 19

Saving Master, 79

User Stamping, 122

USER TOOLS, 133

{

Security}key, 6

Security Mode, 75

Select, 9

Machine Exterior......................................................................................... 1

User Tools}key, 6

User Tools Menu, 135

Separating Printing Sets, 77

service call, 166

Set Operation Modes, 136

Setting Q.start, 141

Setting Up The Paper Delivery Tray, 16

Set User Code, 135, 146

Size, 144

Warning, ii

What To Do If Something Goes Wrong,

165

What You Can Do With This Machine,

viii

Where To Put Your Machine, 193

Size (User Stamp), 144

{

Skip Feed}key, 6

Skip Feed Printing, 70

Skipped Prints, 188

Special Feature indicator , 8

Special Kinds Of Paper, 43

SPECIFICATIONS, 201

Zoom, 35

{

Speed}keys, 7

Stamp, 144

Stamp Density, 144

Stamping Date, 115

Stamping Function, 120

{

Stamp}key, 6

Stamp Position, 144, 154

Standard Printing, 20

{

Start}key, 7

Stopping The Machine During A

Multi-print Run, 29

Storing Your Settings, 72

Stretching And Squeezing The Image In

1 % Steps, 37

System, 135

Thick Paper, 42

Thin Paper, 42

Time Setting, 136, 148

{

Tint}key, 6

Tint Mode, 27

Tint Mode ON/OFF, 138

Trailing Edge Guides, 3

Type, 144

Type of Paper, 143, 154

Type (Page), 145

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Instructions

For safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it

handy for future reference.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.

To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully

and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Notes:

Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

For good print quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine master and ink from the supplier.

The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts

other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.

Power Source

120V, 60Hz, 3.2A or more

Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,

see p.196 “Power Connection”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note to users in the United States of America

Notice:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-

ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur

in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television re-

ception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.

Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Note to users in Canada

Note:

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main switch:

a means POWER ON.

b means POWER OFF.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.

To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully

and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Notes:

Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

For good print quality, Standard recommends that you use genuine Standard masters and inks.

Standard shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts

other than genuine Standard parts in your Standard office product.

Power Source

120V, 60Hz, 3.2A or more

Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,

⇒ p.196 “Power Connection”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety Information

When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be fol-

lowed.

Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

R WARNING:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions

are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.

R CAUTION:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not

followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.

R WARNING:

• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-

tension cord.

• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the

power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.

• To avoid hazardous electric shock, do not remove any covers or

screws other than those specified in this manual.

• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,

not the cable) if any of the following occurs:

• You spill something into the machine.

• You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.

• The external housing of your machine has been damaged.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R CAUTION:

• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.

While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not

be damaged under the machine.

• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the

plug (not the cable).

• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside

the machine.

• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended

supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place

at an authorized dealer.

• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach inside the

machine to remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.

• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-

ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies avail-

able at an authorized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to Read This Manual

Symbols

In this manual, the following symbols are used:

R WARNING:

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in

death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-

structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-

scribed in the Safety Information section.

R CAUTION:

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-

nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury

when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this

symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety

Information section.

* The statements above are notes for your safety.

Important

If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be

damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.

Preparation

This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-

erating the machine.

Note

This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-

eration.

Limitation

This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,

or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

Reference

This symbol indicates a reference.

[

]

Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.

{

}

Keys built into the machine's operation panel.

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Making Prints

Before making prints using this ma-

chine, you have to make a master by

pressing the {Start} key. When you

press the {Start} key, the machine

scans the original image and makes a

master. This procedure describes

how to make basic prints.

B Press the {Start} key.

A Place your originals in one of the

following two ways:

Placing originals on the exposure

glass

C Press the {Proof} key.

A Place a single page face down.

Check the print image.

ZDCH110E

Reference

For changing the image posi-

tion, see p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

Inserting originals in the optional

document feeder

A Insert a stack of originals face

up.

To increase the image density,

press the {W} key. See p.25 “Ad-

justing the Image Density of

Prints”.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ To avoid jamming, fan the

originals before placing them

in the document feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To decrease the image density,

press the {V} key. See p.25 “Ad-

justing the Image Density of

Prints”.

D Enter the desired number of

prints with the number keys.

E Press the {Print} key.

When the print job has finished,

press the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-

er} key. Previously entered job set-

tings will be cleared.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What You Can do with this Machine

Below is a quick summary of this ma-

chine's features and where to look in

this manual for more information.

❖ Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset

Ratios

See p.29 “Reducing and Enlarging

Using Preset Ratios”.

❖ Standard Printing

See p.19 “Standard Printing”.

❖ Energy Saver Mode

See p.22 “Energy Saver Mode”.

❖ Adjusting the Print Image Position

See p.24 “Adjusting the Position of

Printed Images”.

GRRATI0E

❖ Auto Magnification

See p.31 “Auto Magnification”.

GRPOSI0E

* Paper feed direction

❖ Adjusting the Print Image Density

See p.25 “Adjusting the Image

Density of Prints”.

GRAUTO0E

❖ Zoom

See p.34 “Zoom”.

❖ Tint Mode

See p.26 “Tint Mode”.

GRZOOM0E

GRTINT0E

❖ Changing the Printing Speed

See p.27 “Changing the Printing

Speed”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖ Directional Magnification (%)

See p.36 “Directional Magnifica-

tion (%)”.

❖

Economy Mode

See p.50 “Economy Mode”.

❖ Auto Cycle

See p.51 “Auto Cycle”.

❖ All Class Mode

See p.52 “All Class Mode”.

CP2P01EE

❖ Directional Magnification (Size)

See p.38 “Directional Magnifica-

tion (Size)”.

GRCLAS2E

❖ Auto Class Mode

See p.54 “Auto Class Mode”.

CP2M01EE

❖ Erasing Center and Edge Margins

See p.40 “Erasing Center and Edge

Margins”.

GRCLAS2E

❖ Manual Class Mode

See p.57 “Manual Class Mode with

❖ Edge Erase

See p.41 “Edge Erase”.

One Original”.

GRERAS0E

❖ Printing on Various Kinds of Paper

See p.43 “Printing onto Various

Kinds of Paper ”.

GRCLAS2E

❖ Selecting Original Modes

See p.46 “Selecting Original

Modes”.

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖ Manual Class Mode with two or More

Originals

❖

Auto Combine Mode

See p.68 “Auto Combine Mode”.

See p.59 “Manual Class Mode with

two or More Originals”.

1 1

A B

C D

GRACOM0E

GRCLAS1E

❖ Skip Feed Printing

See p.70 “Skip Feed Printing”.

❖ Class Mode

See p.61 “Class Mode”.

❖ Programs

See p.72 “Programs”.

❖ Security Mode

See p.75 “Security Mode”.

R R R

❖ Quality Start Mode

See p.76 “Quality Start Mode”.

R R R

❖ Job Separation

See p.77 “Job Separation”.

GRCLAS0E

❖ Combining Originals

See p.63 “Combine Originals”.

1 2

GRJOBS0E

❖ Conserving the Master

See p.79 “Conserving the Master”.

GRCOMB2E

❖ On Line Printing

See p.80 “On Line Printing”.

❖ Making Color Prints

See p.130 “Making Color Prints”.

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖ Printing in Two Colors

See p.132 “Printing in Two Col-

ors”.

❖

Date Stamp

See p.108 “Date Stamp”.

GRCOLO0E

❖ Page Stamp

See p.110 “Page Stamp”.

❖ Image Rotation

See p.82 “Image Rotation”.

❖ Make-up Printing

See p.94 “Make-up Printing”.

❖ Merging Images

See p.105 “Image Overlay”.

– 1 –

GRPAGE0E

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

❖ Stamp

See p.113 “Stamp”.

Priority

GROVER0E

Preliminary

Confidential

GRSTAM0E

GROVER1E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖ Memory Combine

See p.115 “Memory Combine”.

GRMCOM0E

GRREPE0E

❖ Original Storage

See p.100 “Original Storage”.

❖ Storage Overlay

See p.105 “Image Overlay”.

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

GROVER0E

GROVER1E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Machine Interior.......................................................................................... 2

Option s ........................................................................................................ 4

Operation Pane l .......................................................................................... 6

Keys ............................................................................................................... 6

Indicators........................................................................................................ 8

Panel Display.............................................................................................. 9

Panel Display Layout ................................................................................... 10

1.Operation

Print Paper ................................................................................................ 11

Original s .................................................................................................... 13

Printing Preparation s ............................................................................... 15

Loading Paper.............................................................................................. 15

Setting Up The Paper Delivery Tray ............................................................ 16

Entering a User Code to Use the Machin e ............................................. 18

Standard Printing ..................................................................................... 19

Removing Print s ........................................................................................... 20

Energy Saver Mod e .................................................................................. 22

Auto Reset................................................................................................. 23

Adjusting the Position of Printed Images .............................................. 24

Adjusting the Image Density of Prints.................................................... 25

Before Making a Master............................................................................... 25

After Making a Maste r .................................................................................. 25

Tint Mode................................................................................................... 26

Changing the Printing Speed .................................................................. 27

Stopping a Multi-print Run ...................................................................... 28

Stopping a Multi-print Run to Print Another Original .................................... 28

Changing the Number of Prints Entered and Checking Completed Prints... 28

Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios ....................................... 29

Auto Magnification ................................................................................... 31

Zoom.......................................................................................................... 34

Directional Magnification (%) .................................................................. 36

Directional Magnification (Size) .............................................................. 38

Erasing Center and Edge Margins.......................................................... 40

Edge Erase................................................................................................ 41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper..................................................... 43

Printing onto Thick Pape r ............................................................................. 43

Printing onto Standard Paper....................................................................... 43

Printing onto Envelopes ............................................................................... 44

Printing onto Special Kinds of Paper............................................................ 44

Selecting Original Modes......................................................................... 46

Letter/Photo Mode Printing .......................................................................... 46

Photo Mode Printing..................................................................................... 47

Pencil Mode Printing .................................................................................... 48

Economy Mod e ......................................................................................... 50

Auto Cycle................................................................................................. 51

All Class Mod e .......................................................................................... 52

Auto Class Mode ...................................................................................... 54

Manual Class Mode with One Original ................................................... 57

Manual Class Mode with two or More Original s .................................... 59

Class Mode................................................................................................ 61

Combine Originals.................................................................................... 63

Auto Combine Mode................................................................................. 68

Skip Feed Printin g .................................................................................... 70

Programs................................................................................................... 72

Storing a Progra m ........................................................................................ 72

Protecting a Program ................................................................................... 73

Removing Program Protectio n ..................................................................... 73

Recalling a Program..................................................................................... 74

Security Mod e ........................................................................................... 75

Quality Start Mode.................................................................................... 76

Using Quality Start Manuall y ........................................................................ 76

Job Separation.......................................................................................... 77

Conserving the Master............................................................................. 79

On Line Printing........................................................................................ 80

Auto On Line ................................................................................................ 81

Image Rotation.......................................................................................... 82

Make-up Printing Features ...................................................................... 83

Main Features .............................................................................................. 83

Make-up Modes for Designated Areas......................................................... 83

Make-up Modes for Outside Designated Areas ........................................... 85

Background Patterns.................................................................................... 86

Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing................................................. 87

Command Sheets ........................................................................................ 87

Making a Command Sheet........................................................................... 87

Command Sheets and Finished Prints......................................................... 92

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing ...................................................................................... 94

Make-up Sample s ..................................................................................... 97

Original Storage...................................................................................... 100

Storing Originals......................................................................................... 100

Selecting Stored Originals.......................................................................... 102

Protecting Stored Originals ........................................................................ 102

Deleting Stored Originals ........................................................................... 103

Image Overla y ......................................................................................... 105

Storage Overlay ......................................................................................... 105

On Line Overlay ......................................................................................... 106

Overlay Format .......................................................................................... 106

Date Stamp.............................................................................................. 108

Page Stam p ............................................................................................. 110

Stamp....................................................................................................... 113

Memory Combine ................................................................................... 115

Combining onto a Single–sided Print......................................................... 115

Repeat........................................................................................................ 120

2.Optional Functions

Optional Document Feeder.................................................................... 125

Original s ..................................................................................................... 125

Placing Originals ........................................................................................ 126

Combine Printing........................................................................................ 127

Manual Class Mode with Two or More Originals........................................ 128

Color Printing Using the Optional Color Drum.................................... 130

Making Color Print s .................................................................................... 130

Changing the Color Drum Uni t ................................................................... 130

Printing in Two Colors................................................................................ 132

Changing the Drum Siz e ........................................................................ 134

Printing Area (At 23°C/73°F, 65% RH)....................................................... 134

Master Cut Length...................................................................................... 134

3.Combination Chart

Combination Chart ................................................................................. 135

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.User Tools

Accessing the User Tools...................................................................... 139

User Tools Menu..................................................................................... 141

1. System ................................................................................................... 141

2. Set Operat'n Mode ................................................................................. 142

3. Initial Setting........................................................................................... 143

4. Mode Settin g .......................................................................................... 144

5. Stamp..................................................................................................... 148

6. Administrator Mod e ................................................................................ 150

7. On Line Mode......................................................................................... 151

User Tool Menus in Detail...................................................................... 153

1-6 Time Settin g ......................................................................................... 153

3-4 Reproduction Ratio .............................................................................. 154

3-5 Class Enter No..................................................................................... 154

3-11 Margin Erase Are a ............................................................................. 155

4-11 No. of Skip Feed ................................................................................ 156

4-14 No. of Q.start...................................................................................... 157

4-19 Type of Paper .................................................................................... 158

5-4 Stamp Positio n ..................................................................................... 159

5-7 Position (Date) ..................................................................................... 160

5-10 Position (Page) .................................................................................. 161

5-11 Make/Chg. Patter n ............................................................................. 163

6-1 Check Counter..................................................................................... 164

6-2 Reset Counter s .................................................................................... 164

6-5 Chg. User Code ................................................................................... 165

6-6 Del. User Code .................................................................................... 166

5.Troubleshooting

If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want................................. 167

If You Cannot Make Prints as You Want .............................................. 169

Combine Originals Mode............................................................................ 169

Loading Paper......................................................................................... 170

x Clearing Misfeeds.............................................................................. 171

”x + A” Paper Misfeeds in the Paper Feed Section.................................. 171

”x + A + B” Paper Misfeeds in the Paper Feed Section ........................... 172

”x + B” Paper or Master Wrapped Around the Drum................................ 173

”x + C” Paper Misfeeds in the Paper Exit Section.................................... 175

”x + D” Master Misfeeds in the Master Feed Section............................... 176

”x + D + B ” Master Misfeeds in the Master Feed Section ........................ 176

”x + B + E ” Master Misfeeds in the Master Eject Section......................... 177

”x + E” Master Misfeeds in the Master Eject Section ............................... 178

”x

+ P” Original Misfeeds Occur When Using the Optional Document Feeder ... 179

When the Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M) Lights................................. 181

When the Add Ink Indicator (j) Lights................................................ 182

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the Master End Indicator (C ) Lights.......................................... 184

When the Master Eject Indicator (k ) Lights........................................ 186

When Other Indicators Are Lit............................................................... 187

When Prints Are Not Delivered in a Neat Stack................................... 188

When Printing on Small Size Pape r ........................................................... 188

When the Machine Cannot Detect the Paper Size..................................... 188

Poor Printing........................................................................................... 189

Dirty Background........................................................................................ 189

Black Lines/Stained Prints ......................................................................... 192

Faint Print s ................................................................................................. 192

6.Remarks

Do's and Don'ts ...................................................................................... 193

Where to Put Your Machine................................................................... 195

Environmen t ............................................................................................... 195

Power Connection...................................................................................... 196

Machine Clearance .................................................................................... 196

Maintaining Your Machin e ..................................................................... 197

Cleaning the Main Frame........................................................................... 197

Cleaning the Optional Document Feede r ................................................... 198

7.Specifications

Main Frame.............................................................................................. 199

Document Feeder (Option) .................................................................... 203

Color Drum Type 55(L) A3, 11" × 17" (Option)..................................... 203

Color Drum Type 55(S) A4, 8 / " × 11" (Option) .................................. 203

Exposure Glass Cover (Option )............................................................ 203

Printer Unit Type 80 RCP80 (Option ).................................................... 203

Interface Cable Type 85 (Option) .......................................................... 203

Editing Function Type 85 (Option)........................................................ 203

Twin Color Press Roller Printing System TC-II (Option)..................... 204

Consumables.......................................................................................... 205

INDEX....................................................................................................... 206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

xvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Machine Exterior

1. Front door

Open to access the inside of the machine.

5. Paper feed tray down key

Press to lower the paper feed tray.

2. Flip up cover

Flip up to access the keys underneath.

6. Paper feed side plates

Prevent paper skewing.

3. Operation panel

See p.6 “Operation Panel”.

7. Paper feed tray

Load paper here.

4. Master tray

Open this unit when installing the mas-

ter.

8. Paper feed side plates knob

Use to move the side plates.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Machine Interior

ZBHH180E

1. Main switch

Use to turn the power on or off.

5. Paper delivery tray

Completed prints are delivered here.

2. Paper alignment wings

Lift or lower the wings depending on the

type of paper being used.

6. Paper delivery side plates

These plates align the prints on the paper

delivery tray.

3. Paper delivery end plate

7. Paper delivery side plate knobs

This plate aligns the leading edge of

prints.

Use to move the side plates.

8. Handle E1

Use to pull out the master eject unit.

4. Paper delivery end plate knob

Use to move the end plate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Ink holder

Set the ink cartridge in this holder.

10. Drum unit lock lever B1

Lower to unlock and pull out the drum

unit.

11. Drum unit

The master is wrapped around this unit.

12. Exposure glass

Position originals here face down for

printing.

13. Exposure glass cover or docu-

ment feeder (option)

Lower this cover over an original on the

exposure glass.

14. Trailing edge guides

Swing out these guides when you use A4,

8¹/₂" × 11"KL paper.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Options

❖ Exposure glass cover

1. Exposure glass cover

❖ Document feeder

1. Document Feeder

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖ Twin color press roller printing system TC-II

Note

❒ Other options:

• Color Drum Type 55(L) A3, 11" × 17"

• Color Drum Type 55(S) A4, 8¹/₂" × 11"

• Exposure Glass Cover

• Printer Unit Type 80 RCP80

• Interface Cable Type 85

• Editing Function Type 85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation Panel

Keys

Auto On Line

lay

Original Storage

ZDZS200N

1. {Quality Start} key

9. {Image Density} key

See p.76 “Quality Start Mode”.

Press to make prints darker or lighter. See

p.25 “Adjusting the Image Density of

Prints”.

2. {Security } key

See p.75 “Security Mode”.

10. {Economy Mode} key

Press to save ink. See p.50 “Economy

Mode”.

3. {Skip Feed} key

Press to select skip feed printing. See p.70

“Skip Feed Printing”.

11. {Original Storage } key

Press to select the Original Storage func-

tion. See p.100 “Original Storage”.

4. {User Tools} key

Press to change the default settings to

meet your requirements.

12. {On Line} key

See p.80 “On Line Printing”.

5. {Stamp} key

Press to select the Stamp mode. See p.108

“Date Stamp ”, see p.110 “Page Stamp”,

see p.113 “Stamp”.

13. {Auto On Line} key

See p.80 “On Line Printing”.

6. {Make-Up} key

Press to select the Make-up mode. See

14. {Job Separator } key

See p.77 “Job Separation ”.

p.94 “Make-up Printing”.

15. {Combine } key

7. {Overlay} key

Press to select the Image Overlay mode.

See p.105 “Image Overlay”.

Press to combine originals onto one print.

See p.63 “Combine Originals”, see p.115

“Memory Combine”, see p.68 “Auto

Combine Mode”.

8. {Edge Erase} key

Press to select Edge Erase mode. See p.41

“Edge Erase”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16. {

Class } key

Press to select All Class, Auto Class,

Manual Class, or Class mode. See p.52

“All Class Mode ”, see p.54 “Auto Class

Mode”, see p.57 “Manual Class Mode

with One Original”, see p.59 “Manual

Class Mode with two or More Originals ”,

see p.61 “Class Mode ”.

17. {W} {V} keys (Speed keys)

Press to adjust the printing speed. See

p.25 “Adjusting the Image Density of

Prints”, see p.27 “Changing the Printing

Speed”.

18. {~}{}}{|}{{} keys

Press to shift the image forward, back-

ward, right, or left. See p.24 “Adjusting

the Position of Printed Images”.

Also use to highlight items you wish to

select on the panel display.

19. {Program} key

Press to enter or recall programs. See p.72

“Programs”.

20. Number keys

Press to enter the desired number of

prints and data for selected modes.

21. {Clear/Stop} key

Press to stop printing.

22. {q} key

Use to enter data in selected modes.

23. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key

Press to clear any previously entered job

settings.

24. {Start} key

Press to make a master.

25. {Auto Cycle} key

Use to process the master and make

prints in one operation. See p.51 “Auto

Cycle”.

26. {Proof} key

Press to make proof prints.

27. {Print} key

Press to start printing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indicators

1. Special feature indicator

6. Counter

Lights to indicate that special features

have been selected. To access the special

features, lift up the cover on the left side

of the operation panel.

Displays the number of prints entered.

While printing, it shows the number of

prints remaining.

7. Panel display

See p.9 “Panel Display”.

2. Monitor indicators

These indicators light to inform you of

the status of the machine. See p.167 “If

Your Machine Does Not Operate as You

Want”.

8. Data In indicator (Green)

Indicates the status of this machine:

• On: Data waiting for Master Making

and printing is in the machine.

3. A3/11" × 17" drum indicator

Lights when the A3, 11" × 17" drum unit

is installed. See p.134 “Changing the

Drum Size ”.

• Blinking: Data is being received, or

Master Making or printing is in

progress.

• Off: Master Making and printing are

4. A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" drum indicator

completed.

Lights when the A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" drum unit

is installed. See p.134 “Changing the

Drum Size ”.

9. Error indicator (Red)

Indicates the status of this machine:

• On: An error has occurred. Master

Making and printing stops.

• Off: Normal status

5. Color drum indicator

Lights when the color drum unit is in-

stalled. See p.130 “Color Printing Using

the Optional Color Drum”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Panel Display

The panel display shows the machine status, error messages, and function

menus.

ZBZX170N

1. Items for the selected function

3. Machine status or messages

2. These keys correspond to the se-

lectable items shown above them on

the panel display. To select an item

shown on the panel display, press

the key directly below it.

4. Items which can be selected

Important

❒ Strong impact or pressure exceeding 30N will damage the panel display.

Note

Auto

❒ When you select an item on the panel display, it is highlighted (e.g.

Items shown grayed-out (e.g.

) cannot be selected.

❒ Common panel display items

[OK]

Confirms a function selection or enters a value.

[Cancel]

Cancels a function selection or entered value and returns to

the previous display.

[Prev.][Next]

When there are too many items to fit on the panel display, use

these keys to move between pages.

{~}{}}{|}{{}[←][→]

Press to highlight items you wish to select on the panel dis-

play.

[Select]

Selects a value.

[Exit]

Returns to the previous display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Panel Display Layout

The basic elements used on the panel display are shown below. Understanding

their meaning helps you use this machine's features quickly and easily.

❖ Sample display when selecting the [Original] key

ZBZX180N

1. Machine status or message

2. Available functions

3. Illustrations of displays in this

manual show the next key to be

pressed whitened

When the [Original] key is pressed, the following display is shown.

1. Available functions

2. Confirms the settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Operation

Print Paper

The following limitations apply

Paper Size

Inch

Paper

Weight

Metric

11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" × 14" L,

Paper feed tray A3 L, B4 L, A4 L K, B5 L K,

A5 L, B6 L, A6 L, Others (Ver-

tical: 70 - 297mm, Horizontal: 148

- 432mm)

47.1 -

209.3g/m²,

12.5 - 55.6 lb

8¹/₂" × 11" L K, 5¹/₂" ×

8¹/₂" L K, Others (Verti-

cal: 2.76" - 11.7", Horizon-

tal: 5.83" - 17")

Non-recommended paper:

• Roughly cut paper

• Paper of different thickness in the same stack

• Envelopes heavier than 85g/m², 22 lb.

• Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper

• Torn paper

• Slippery paper

• Rough paper

• Paper with any kind of coating (such as carbon)

• Short grain paper

• Thin paper that has low stiffness

• Paper that may create a lot of dust

• Grained paper with the direction of the grain running opposite to the feed di-

rection

• Certain types of long thin envelopes.

E.g. international mail envelopes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

• The following types of envelopes

Note

❒ If you print on rough grained paper, the copy image might be blurred.

❒ You can use A3 (297 × 420mm) or 11" × 17" originals or printing paper. When

you want to print the entire image of an A3, 11" × 17" original, select Reduce

mode because the maximum print areas are as follows:

• Metric version: 290 × 409mm, 11.4" × 16.1"

• Inch version: 290 × 419mm, 11.4" × 16.4"

❒ When you use A3, 11" × 17" and 209.3g/m², 55.6 lb paper, slow the printing

speed down to setting 1, 2, or 3.

Important

❒ Correct curls in the paper before placing it in the machine. When you cannot

correct the paper curl, stack the paper with the curl face down or face up as

shown in the illustration. If the paper is curled, it might wrap around the

drum or stains might appear.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Originals

The machine can detect the following original sizes placed on the exposure glass.

Metric version

Inch version

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL

11" × 17"L , 8¹/₂" × 14"L, 8¹/₂" × 11"KL

Reference

For the original sizes placed in the document feeder can be detected, see p.125

“Optional Document Feeder”.

If the machine cannot detect the original sizes properly, select the area to copy

with the {Edge Erase} key. See p.41 “Edge Erase”. The machine may not detect

the original size properly when:

• Originals contain index tabs.

• Originals are OHP transparencies or are translucent.

• Originals are dark.

• Originals contain solid images.

• Originals are of sizes other than those listed above.

If you do not lift the exposure glass cover more than 30cm, 12" when you place

another original, the machine might not detect the next original size correctly.

The maximum original size you can place on the exposure glass is 304.8 ×

432mm, 12" × 17".

If you use originals that have bold letters or solid images at the leading edges,

you might get prints with dirty edges. In this case, place the original face down

with the widest margin toward the paper delivery tray or raise the printing

speed.

Make sure any correction fluid or ink is completely dry before placing originals

on the exposure glass. Not taking this precaution could mark the exposure glass

and cause marks to be printed.

In most situations, place originals as shown below.

R R

ZDZX030E

When the original is placed in a direction that differs from the print paper, the

machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the print paper

direction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

The first 8mm, 0.32", of the leading edge and the last 2mm, 0.08", of the trailing

edge cannot be printed. Make sure the leading edge margin is at least 8mm,

0.32", and the trailing edge margin is at least 2mm, 0.08".

Original

a = 8mm, 0.32"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing Preparations

D Place the paper on the paper feed

Loading Paper

tray.

A Carefully open the paper feed

tray.

Note

ZDCY130E

❒ Correct the paper curl before

loading the paper. If you cannot

do so, stack the paper with the

curl face down.

B Lift the paper feed side plates.

Reference

See p.11 “Print Paper”.

E Make sure that the paper feed

side plates touch both sides of the

paper lightly.

C Grasp the paper feed side plates

knob and adjust the paper feed

side plates to match the paper

size.

Note

❒ Make sure that the paper size

and direction in the panel dis-

play correspond with the actual

paper size and direction set on

the paper feed tray.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

When you use standard paper

(47.1 g/m²to 105 g/m², 12.5 lb to

28 lb)

Setting Up The Paper Delivery

Tray

A Adjust the side plates to match

the paper size scale on the end

plate side.

A Raise the paper delivery tray

slightly, and then gently lower it

with your hand.

C Lower or lift the paper alignment

wings by turning the left and

right knobs.

ZBHH050E

B Raise each paper delivery side

plate, and then grasp the side

plate knobs and move the paper

delivery side plates to match the

print paper size.

Note

❒ When the guides are up, you

might not be able to load the

unit to full capacity (1,000

sheets) depending on the paper

you are using.

❒ Lift the paper alignment wings

if B5L prints are curled.

When you use 81.4 g/m², 21.6 lb

or thicker paper

ZDZH180E

Note

Lower the paper alignment wings.

❒ The inside of the plates should

correspond to the paper size.

When you use 81.4 g/m², 21.6 lb

or thinner and B5 or smaller paper

Whenyouusethickpaper (128g/m²

to 209.3 g/m², 34 lb to 55.6 lb)

Lower the paper alignment wings.

A Adjust the side plates to match

the paper size scale on the

main frame side.

When you use 81.4 g/m², 21.6 lb

or thinner and A4, 8¹/₂× 11" or

larger paper

Lift the paper alignment wings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing Preparations

When you use A4, 8 ¹/₂"

paper

11"KL

A Swing out the guides as shown

in the illustration.

ZDZY020E

D Turn on the main switch.

TPEH021E

Note

❒ You can have the machine dis-

play how much ink and master

are left when you switch it on.

See “User Tools—Ink/Master

Left” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Entering a User Code to Use the Machine

If user codes are turned on, operators

B Press the {q} key.

must enter their user code before they

can use the machine. The machine

keeps count of the number of copies

made under each user code.

Note

❒ If you want to use this feature, you

must turn it on and register the

user codes with the user tools. You

can register up to 20 user codes.

See “Set User Code” and “Reg.

User Code” on p.150 “6. Adminis-

C Make your prints.

trator Mode”.

D To prevent others from making

prints with your user code, hold

downthe{ClearModes/EnergySaver}

key,andthenpressthe{Clear/Stop}

key.

❒ When user codes are turned on,

the machine will prompt you for

your user code when you turn on

the main switch or after the ma-

chine has been reset.

A Enter your 4–digit user code with

the number keys.

Note

❒ User codes are not displayed on

the panel display.

❒ To change the number entered,

pressthe{Clear/Stop}keyanden-

ter the new number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard Printing

A Make sure that the machine is E Place the original face down on

ready for printing.

the exposure glass. The original

should be aligned with the refer-

ence mark and the left corner

scale.

B If user codes are turned on, enter

your user code with the number

keys, and then press the {q } key.

Reference

See p.18 “Entering a User Code

to Use the Machine”.

C Make sure that there are no previ-

1. Left corner scale

2. Reference mark

ous settings remaining.

Note

❒ To clear any previous settings,

press the {Clear Modes/Energy

Saver} key.

F Lower the exposure glass cover.

G Make your desired settings.

H Press the {Start} key.

D Lift the exposure glass cover.

TPEH010E

A trial print is delivered to the pa-

per delivery tray.

Note

❒ Be sure to lift the exposure glass

cover more than 30cm, 12".

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

I Press the{Proof} keyandcheck the K Press the {Print} key.

image density and the image po-

sition on the proof print.

Note

❒ To stop the machine during a

margins will appear on prints.

multi-print run, press the

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images ”.

{Clear/Stop} key.

❒ To return the machine to the ini-

tial condition after printing,

press the {Clear Modes/Energy

Saver} key.

❒ If the image density is slightly

dark or light, adjust the image

density using the {W}{V} keys.

See p.25 “Adjusting the Image

Density of Prints”.

Removing Prints

A Pull the front paper delivery side

J Enter the number of prints re-

plate down towards you to open.

quired with the number keys.

Note

❒ You cannot open the rear paper

❒ To change the number entered,

pressthe{Clear/Stop}keyanden-

ter the new number.

delivery side plate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard Printing

B Remove the prints from the paper

delivery tray and close the paper

delivery side plate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Energy Saver Mode

If you do not operate the machine for a certain period, the display disappears

and the machine enters Energy Saver mode to reduce energy consumption.

Note

❒ You can change the time the machine waits before Energy Saver mode starts.

See “Energy Saving” on p.141 “1. System”.

❒ The machine will not automatically enter Energy Saver mode in such cases as

follows:

• If there is no ink

• If originals or paper are jammed

• If the machine is making master or printing

• If the machine is printing the second page of a combined print job

• If the machine is loading original images in memory

• If there is no paper

• If there is no master

• If the master eject unit is full

• If originals are left on the document feeder

• If the “cover open” message is displayed

• If the settings have been reset to their defaults

• If there are prints in the sorter's paper delivery tray

• If the User Code entry screen is displayed

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Reset

If you do not operate the machine for a certain period after printing, the machine

will return to the initial condition. This function is called “Auto Reset”.

Note

❒ You can change the time the machine waits before Auto Reset starts. See “Au-

to Reset” on p.141 “1. System”.

❒ The machine will not enter Auto Reset in such cases as follows:

• If there is no ink

• If originals or paper are jammed

• If the machine is making master or printing

• If the machine is printing the second page of a combined print job

• If the machine is loading original images in memory

• If there is no paper

• If there is no master

• If the master eject unit is full

• If originals are left on the document feeder

• If the “cover open” message is displayed

• If the settings have been reset to their defaults

• If you select “Off” for “Auto Reset” with the user tools

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Adjusting the Position of Printed Images

Use the following procedure to adjust

B Adjust image position using the

the position of print images as re-

{~}, {}}, {|}, and {{} keys.

quired.

GRPOSI0E

Note

* Paper feed direction

❒ When you shift the image for-

ward, leave a 10mm, 0.4" mar-

gin at the leading edge. If there

is no margin, paper might wrap

around the drum and cause a

misfeed.

Limitation

❒ For 308 mm, 12.2"-width paper,

you can only adjust the position of

the print image 5 mm, 0.2" up or

down.

❒ The {~} and {}} keys shift the

image up to 15mm, 0.6" each

way in 0.5mm, 0.02" steps.

Note

❒ When the main switch is turned

off, the position returns to the de-

fault.

❒ The {|} and {{} keys shift the

image up to 10mm, 0.4" each

way in 0.5mm, 0.02" steps.

A Press the [Image =] key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Press the {Proof} key to check the

image position.

Note

❒ You can skip step A and adjust

the image position directly by

pressing the {~}, {}}, {|},

and {{} keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the Image Density of Prints

There are two ways to adjust the im-

age density of prints:

After Making a Master

❖ Before making a master

Use the {Image Density} key.

A To increase the image density,

press the {W} key. To reduce the

image density, press the {V} key.

❖ After making a master

Use the {W}{V} (Speed) keys.

Before Making a Master

A Press the {Image Density} key to ad-

just the image density.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Note

❒ The faster the printing speed be-

comes, the lighter the printing

density is. If you want darker

prints, decrease the printing

speed.

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS010N

B Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Tint Mode

Use this function to make halftone

prints.

GRTINT0E

A Press the [Original] key.

B Select the [Tint] with the [←] [→]

or {~} {}} keys.

C Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the Printing Speed

Use the {W} or {V} key to adjust the

printing speed. The relationship be-

tween printing speed and print quali-

ty depends on the type of paper you

use.

A Press the {V} key to increase the

speed and press the {W} key to re-

duce the speed.

Note

❒ The following speeds are avail-

able:

• Setting 1:

60 sheets/minute

• Setting 2:

75 sheets/minute

• Setting 3 (default):

90 sheets/minute

• Setting 4:

105 sheets/minute

• Setting 5:

120 sheets/minute

❒ The faster the printing speed be-

comes, the lighter the printing

density is, and vice versa.

❒ When the machine is used in

low temperature conditions, the

image density might decrease.

In this case, slow the printing

speed down to setting 1 or 2.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Stopping a Multi-print Run

Stopping a Multi-print Run to

Print Another Original

Changing the Number of

Prints Entered and Checking

Completed Prints

A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.

B Set the original.

B Change the number of prints or

C Enter the number of prints and

check the completed prints.

press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ To change the number of prints,

press the {Clear/Stop} key, and

then re-enter the number of

prints with the number keys.

C Press the {Print} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset

Ratios

Use this function to have originals re-

duced or enlarged by a preset ratio. A

total of 7 ratios are available (3 en-

largement ratios, 4 reduction ratios).

❒ You can select a ratio regardless of

the size of an original or printing

paper. With some ratios, parts of

the image might not be printed or

❒ You can change the preset repro-

duction ratios with the user tools.

See “Reproduction Ratio” on p.154

“3-4 Reproduction Ratio”.

❒ Prints can be reduced or enlarged

as follows.

GRRATI0E

❖ Metric version

Ratio (%) Original → Print paper size

Note

141

122

115

A4 → A3, A5 → A4, B5 → B4

A4 → B4, A5 → B5

B4 → A3, B5 → A4

—

❒ The leading edge of the print im-

age does not shift when a print im-

age is made with this function.

A3 → B4, A4 → B5

B4 → A4, B5 → A5

A3 → A4, A4 → A5, B4 → B5

❖ Inch version

Ratio (%) Original → Print paper size

155

129

5 ¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂" → 8 ¹/₂" × 14"

8 ¹/₂" × 11" → 11" × 17", 5

¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11"

121

8 ¹/₂" × 14" → 11" × 17"

1. Place on the exposure glass

—

2. Place in the optional document

feeder

8 ¹/₂" × 14" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11"

11" × 15" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11"

* Paper feed direction

a = 8mm, 0.32"

11" × 17" → 8 ¹/₂" × 11", 8

¹/₂" × 11" → 5 ¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

A Press the [Ratio] key.

G Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

F Check the image position on the trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the[Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

H Make your prints.

B Select the desired ratio with the

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

E Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

F Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Magnification

Use this function to have the machine choose an appropriate enlargement or re-

duction ratio based on the size of your original and the paper size you select.

GRAUTO0E

Note

❒ The range of ratios which the machine can select depends on where you place

the original:

• On the exposure glass: 50 – 200%

❒ The table below shows the reproduction ratios that can be selected for various

combinations of original and paper size.

❖ Metric version

Original A3L

B4L

A4L

A4K

B5L

B5K

A5L ^*2A5K ^*2

Paper

A3L

B4L

A4L

A4K

B5L

B5K

A5L

B6L

100%

87%

71%

71% ^*1

61%

61% ^*1

50%

115%

100%

82%

141%

122%

100%

163%

141%

200%

173%

100% ^*1115%

115% ^*1115%

100%

100% ^*1122%

100% ^*1100% 122% ^*1122%

115% ^*1141%

141% ^*1

82% ^*1

100% ^*1100%

141% ^*1141%

122% ^*1

71%

87%

87% ^*1

71% ^*1

50%

87% ^*1

87%

71%

71% ^*1

61% ^*1

82%

71%

82% ^*1

71% ^*1

100%

87%

100% ^*1

87% ^*1

50%

61%

The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper

direction and selects an appropriate reproduction ratio. See p.82 “Image Rota-

tion”.

Place these originals in the optional document feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

❖ Inch version

8¹/₂" × 14" 8¹/₂" × 11" 8¹/₂" × 11" 8¹/₂"

5¹/₂" 8¹/₂× 5¹/₂"

Original 11" × 17"

L ^*2

K ^*2

Paper

11" × 17"L 100%

121%

100%

129%

200%

155%

8¹/₂" × 14"

77%

8¹/₂" × 11"

100% ^*1

100%

129% ^*1

129%

65%

77%

100%

129%

8¹/₂" × 11" 65% ^*1

77% ^*1

61%

100% ^*1

65%

129% ^*1

100%

8¹/₂"×5¹/₂"

65% ^*1

100% ^*1

50%

The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90 ° to match the paper

direction and selects an appropriate reproduction ratio. See p.82 “Image Rota-

tion”.

Place these originals in the optional document feeder.

❒ Depending on the original type, a suitable reproduction ratio might not be

able to be selected. See p.13 “Originals” and see p.125 “Originals”.

A Place your original on the exposure glass or in the optional document feed-

er.

B Press the [Ratio] key.

C Select [Auto] with the [→] or {}} key.

D Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Magnification

E Press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] keys. See

p.24 “Adjusting the Position of Printed Images”.

G Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Zoom

Use this function to fine-tune the re-

production ratio in increments of 1%.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Make sure that [Zoom] is selected.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Select the desired reproduction

ratio in one of the following

ways:

GRZOOM0E

Note

❒ The range of ratios you can select

depends on where you place the

original:

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

• On the exposure glass: 50–200%

A Press the [Ratio] key.

Using the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys

A Adjust the ratio with the [←]

[→] or {~} {}} keys.

B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}

key.

Note

❒ To select a custom ratio, select

the closest ratio with the [←]

[→] or {~} {}} keys. Then

press the {|} or {{} key and go

to step F.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zoom

K Check the image position on the

Using the number keys

trial or proof print.

A Enter the ratio with the num-

ber keys.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the[Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

L Make your prints.

B Press the {q} key.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

I Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

J Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Directional Magnification (%)

Use this function to choose different

D Select [Direct.Mag.(%)] with the [→]

reproduction ratios for the horizontal

and vertical directions. The result is a

squeezing or stretching effect.

or {}} key.

E Press the [OK] key.

CP2P01EE

F Enter the vertical and horizontal

ratio.

Note

❒ The range of ratios you can select

depends on where you place the

original:

• On the exposure glass: 50 –

200%

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

pressthe{Clear/Stop}keyanden-

ter the new value.

A Press the [Ratio] key.

Adjusting ratios with the [←] [→]

or {~} {}} keys

A Adjust the vertical ratio with

the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

B Press the {{} key.

B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}

C Adjust the horizontal ratio with

key.

the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

C Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Directional Magnification (%)

Entering ratios with the number

keys

A Enter the vertical ratio with the

number keys.

B Press the {q} key.

C Enter the horizontal ratio with

the number keys.

D Press the {q} key.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

I Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

J Press the {Start} key.

K Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

L Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Directional Magnification (Size)

Use this function to have the machine

A Press the [Ratio] key.

select suitable reproduction ratios

based upon the dimensions of the

print you require and the size of the

original you specify.

B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}

key.

CP2M01EE

1. Horizontal original size

2. Vertical original size

3. Horizontal print size

4. Vertical print size

Note

C Press the [OK] key.

❒ You can enter sizes within the fol-

lowing ranges.

D Select [Direct.Mag.(Size)] with the

Metric ver-

sion

1 - 999mm (in 1mm steps)

[→] or {}} key.

Inch version 0.1" - 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)

❒ The range of ratios which the ma-

chine can select depends on where

you place the original:

• On the exposure glass: 50-200%

❒ If the calculated ratio is over the

maximum or under the minimum

ratio, it is corrected within the

range of ratios automatically.

E Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Directional Magnification (Size)

F Enter the vertical original size M Press the {Start} key.

with the number keys and press

the {q} key.

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

pressthe{Clear/Stop}keyanden-

ter the new value.

N Check the image position on the

❒ Up to 999mm, 99.9" can be en-

trial or proof print.

tered.

G Enter the vertical print size with

the number keys, and then press

the {q} key.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the[Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

H Enter the horizontal original size

with the number keys, and then

press the {q} key.

O Make your prints.

I Enter the horizontal print size

with the number keys.

J Press the [OK] key.

The machine will select appropri-

ate reproduction ratios for the ver-

tical and horizontal directions.

K Make sure that the original and

the print paper are the correct

size.

L Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Erasing Center and Edge Margins

When printing from thick books, or

B Keep the exposure glass cover at

similar originals, the binding margin

at the center and the edges might ap-

pear on prints. To prevent this, per-

form the following steps.

an angle of at least 25 degrees

with the exposure glass.

C Press the {Start} key.

Important

❒ Be sure to keep the platen cover at

an angle of at least 25 degrees with

the exposure glass.

❒ If you do not press hard on the

book while it is scanned, the mar-

gin at the center might no be

erased completely.

Note

❒ If your originals have solid images

at the edges, the machine might

recognize the solid images as shad-

ows and not copy them. In this

case, use Edge Erase mode so that

only the shadows are not copied.

See p.41 “Edge Erase”.

Note

❒ Press hard on the book with

your hand while it is scanned.

D Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

A Set the book on the exposure

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the[Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

glass.

E Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Edge Erase

This function erases all four margins

of the original image.

A Press the {Edge Erase} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

❖ Using Edge Erase mode

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

GRERAS0E

ZDZS150N

❖ When not using Edge Erase mode

When printing from thick books,

or similar originals, the binding

margin at the center and the edges

might appear on prints. The ma-

chine erases these margins auto-

matically. If you do not use Edge

Erase mode using the following

kind of originals, the images to be

printed might be also erased.

B Select the size and direction of the

original with the [←] [→] or {~}

{}} keys.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

GRERAS1E

Note

❒ You can adjust the size of the mar-

gins with the user tools. The de-

fault is 2mm, 0.1". See p.155 “3-11

Margin Erase Area”.

E Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

F Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

G Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper

Before printing onto thick paper, thin

paper, envelopes or special kinds of

paper loaded in the paper feed tray,

you must select the paper type.

Printing onto Standard Paper

If you wish to print onto standard

(47.1 to 105g/m², 12.5 to 28 lb) paper,

perform the following steps.

Printing onto Thick Paper

A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.

If you wish to print onto thick (128 to

209.3g/m², 34 to 55.6 lb or heavier)

paper, perform the following steps.

A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.

B Make sure that [Std.] is selected.

B Select [Thick] with the [→] or {}}

key.

C Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

E If your envelopes do not feed in

well, lift the paper feed tray a lit-

tle, and then lower it so that it

slants up slightly.

Printing onto Envelopes

A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.

B Select [Special] with the [→] or {}}

key.

Printing onto Special Kinds of

Paper

Preparation

To use this function, you have to

[

User1] or [User2] with the user tools.

See p.158 “4-19 Type of Paper”.

C Press the [OK] key.

A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.

D Place the envelopes in the paper

feed tray as shown in the illustra-

tion.

B Select [User1] or [User2] with the

GRENVE0E

* Paper feed direction

Note

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

❒ When you use envelopes, the

paper feed tray capacity is

about 150 sheets (85g/m², 22 lb)

or enough to load a stack up to

105mm, 4.1" high.

C Press the [OK] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

If paper misfeeds occur frequently,

even if you have selected a suitable

paper, follow the steps below.

^APress the [Select] key.

^BSelect the type of paper misfeed

and frequency with the {~}, {}},

{|}, or {{} keys.

^CPress the [OK] key.

If paper misfeeds occur frequently in

the paper exit section, even if you are

using standard or thin paper and

have selected [Std.], do the following:

^ASet the wing guide to the “Down”

position with the user tools. See

“Deflector Angle” on p.144 “4.

Mode Setting”.

If A4 – B5, 8¹/₂" × 11" thick paper is

not delivered properly to the paper

delivery tray, do the following:

^ASet the wing guide to the “Up” po-

sition with the user tools. See “De-

flector Angle” on p.144 “4. Mode

Setting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Selecting Original Modes

Select one of the following five modes

to match your originals:

Letter/Photo Mode Printing

❖ Letter mode

Select when originals contain only

letters (no pictures).

Preparation

You can adjust the contrast of the

image.

❖ Letter/Photo mode

Select when originals contain pho-

tographs or pictures with letters.

A Press the [Original] key.

❖ Photo mode

Select when originals contain pho-

tographs or pictures with delicate

tones.

❖ Pencil mode

Select when originals are written

in pencil.

B Select [Letter/Photo] with the [→]

or {}} key.

❖ Tint mode

Select when you want to make

halftone printing.

Note

❒ You can adjust the sharpness of

text in Letter mode with the user

tools. See “Adjusting sharpness of

letters” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

C Press the [Contrast] key.

❒ When using Photo mode to print

originals with both text and photo-

graphs, the text will appear lighter.

To avoid this, select Letter/Photo

mode. Alternatively, use the op-

tional Make-up mode to specify

Letter mode for text areas and Pho-

to mode for photograph areas.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting Original Modes

D Adjust the contrast with the [←]

Photo Mode Printing

[→] or {~} {}} keys.

A Press the [Original] key.

Note

❒ Use "High" to produce clear

B Select [Photo] with the [→] or {}}

prints of people's faces.

key.

❒ Use "Low" to produce clear

prints of landscapes and scen-

ery etc.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

G Press the {Start} key.

C Press the [OK] key.

Adjusting the photo mode contrast

H Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

A Press the [Contrast] key.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

I Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

B Adjust the contrast with the

G Press the {Start} key.

[←][→] or {~}{}} keys.

C Press the [OK] key.

H Check the image position on the

Note

trial or proof print.

❒ Use "High" to produce clear

prints of people's faces.

❒ Use "Low" to produce clear

prints of landscapes and

scenery etc.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the[Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

D Select the dot pattern with the [←]

[→] or {~} {}} keys.

I Make your prints.

Pencil Mode Printing

Note

❒ Originals written in pencil should

be placed on the exposure glass.

A Press the [Original] key.

Note

❒ Four dot patterns are available:

• Setting 1: clearest

• Setting 2: clearer than setting 3

• Setting 3: clearer than setting 4

• Setting 4: clearer than the

standard setting

E Press the [OK] key.

F Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting Original Modes

B Select [Pencil] with the [→] or {}}

key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Place your original on the expo-

sure glass.

E Press the {Start} key.

F Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

G Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Economy Mode

When you want to save ink, select

Economy mode.

Note

❒ Prints will be lighter in this mode.

A Press the {Economy Mode} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS020N

B Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

C Press the {Start} key.

D Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

E Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Cycle

Use the {Auto Cycle} key to process

masters and make prints in a single

operation.

A If the indicator of {Auto Cycle} key

is off, press the {Auto Cycle} key.

B Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

All Class Mode

Note

You have to store the number of

students in each class with the user

tools. See p.154 “3-5 Class Enter

No.”.

❒

When you choose All Class mode,

Job Separation mode is automati-

cally turned on. The job separator

pulls the top sheet of the each set

delivered to the paper delivery tray

to mark the end of each printed set.

The next cycle begins automatical-

ly. See p.77 “Job Separation ”.

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from the same original. All the

stored numbers of prints are made for

each set.

❒ You can cancel Job Separation

mode in All Class mode with the

user tools. See “Auto Separate” on

p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

This feature is useful for teachers who

frequently make multiple print sets

for classes e.g. notes, handouts, tests

etc.

Using a standard print mode, the

teacher would have to stand by the

machine entering the number of

prints and pressing the {Print} key for

each class. However, All Class mode

allows you to store the number of stu-

dents in each class into the machine

memory beforehand with the user

tools. Whenever you need to make

print sets for all the classes, place

your original, select [ALL] and press

the {Start} key. Print sets will be made

containing the correct number of

prints for each class.

A Press the {Class} key.

B Make sure that [ALL] is selected.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Place one original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

GRCLAS2E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All Class Mode

E Press the {Start} key.

F Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

G Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Auto Class Mode

Note

You have to store the number of

students in each class with the user

tools. See p.154 “3-5 Class Enter

No.”.

❒

When you set Auto Class mode,

Job Separation mode is automati-

cally turned on. The job separator

pulls the top sheet of the each set

delivered to the paper delivery tray

to mark the end of each printed set.

The next cycle begins automatical-

ly. See p.77 “Job Separation ”.

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from the same original. The

stored numbers of prints are made for

each set.

❒ You can cancel Job Separation

mode in Auto Class mode with the

user tools. See “Auto Separate” on

p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

This feature is useful for teachers who

frequently make multiple print sets

for their classes, e.g. notes, handouts,

tests etc.

Using a standard print function, the

teacher would have to stand by the

machine entering the number of

prints and pressing the {Print} key for

each class. However, Auto Class

mode allows you to store the number

of students in each class into the ma-

chine memory beforehand with the

user tools. Then, whenever you need

to make print sets for several classes,

place your original, select the classes

that need prints and press the {Start}

key. Print sets will be made contain-

ing the correct number of prints for

each class.

A Press the {Class} key.

B Select[By-class]withthe[→]or{}}

key.

C Press the [OK] key.

GRCLAS2E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Class Mode

D Select the desired classes for each

Selecting classes with the

number keys

grade.

A Enter the desired grade and

class with the number keys.

Selecting classes with the {~},

{}}, {|}, or {{} key

A Select the desired class for the

1^stgrade with the {}} key.

The number of students is dis-

played on the counter.

Note

❒ When you want to select all

❒ For example, to select grade 2

class 4, enter 24.

the classes, select [ALL].

B Press the [Select] key.

❒ When you want to select all

the classes for one grade, en-

ter the grade number fol-

lowed by 0.

Note

❒ Repeat steps A and B until

you have finished designat-

ing classes for the 1st grade.

B Press the {q} key.

❒ To cancel a class selection, se-

lect that class with the {~},

{}}, {|}, or {{} key, and

then press the [Cancel] key.

❒ When you want to select

many classes for one grade,

first select [ALL] and press the

[Select] key, and then dese-

lect the unnecessary classes

with the [Cancel] key.

Note

C Press the {{} key.

❒ To cancel a class, select that

class with the {~}, {}}, {|},

or {{} key, and then press

the [Cancel] key.

Now you can select classes for

the 2^ndgrade.

D Select the desired class for the

2^ndgrade with the {~}, {}},

{|}, or {{} key.

❒ Repeat steps A and B until

you have finished selecting

all the desired classes.

E Press the [Select] key.

Note

E Press the [OK] key.

❒ Repeat steps C to E until

you have finished designat-

ing all the desired classes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

F Place one original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

G Press the {Start} key.

H Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

I Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual Class Mode with One Original

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from the same original. Vari-

ous numbers of prints are made for

each set.

B Select [Manual] with the [→] or {}}

key.

C Press the [OK] key.

GRCLAS2E

D Enter the desired number of

prints for the first set with the

number keys.

Note

❒ When you set the Manual Class

mode, Job Separation mode is au-

tomatically turned on. The job sep-

arator pulls the top sheet of each

set delivered to the paper delivery

tray to mark the end of each print-

ed set. The next cycle begins auto-

matically. See p.77 “Job

Separation ”.

E Press the {q} key.

❒ To stop Job Separation mode from

automatically turning on, use the

user tools. See “Auto Separate” on

p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

A Press the {Class} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

F Enter the desired number of L Make your prints.

prints for the second set with the

number keys.

G Press the {q} key.

Note

❒ Repeat steps F and G for each

set.

❒ The maximum number of sets

that can be made is 20.

H Press the [OK] key.

I Place one original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

J Press the {Start} key.

K Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual Class Mode with two or More Originals

Manual Class Mode with two or More

Originals

Preparation

A Press the {Class} key.

To use this function, you have to

select “by each original” with the

“Class Manual Set” setting in the

user tools. See “Class Manual Set”

on p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from different originals. Vari-

ous numbers of prints are made for

each set.

B Select [Manual] with the [→] or {}}

A B

key.

C D

GRCLAS1E

Note

❒ When you set Manual Class mode,

Job Separation mode is automati-

cally turned on. The job separator

pulls the top sheet of each set de-

livered to the paper delivery tray

to mark the end of each printed set.

The next cycle begins automatical-

ly. See p.77 “Job Separation”.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Enter the desired number of

prints for the first original with

the number keys.

❒ You can suspend Job Separation

mode whenever you set the Manu-

al Class mode with the user tools.

See “Auto Separate” on p.144 “4.

Mode Setting”.

E Press the {q} key.

❒ With the optional document feed-

er, you can place several originals

and make prints of all of them at

once. See p.128 “Manual Class

Mode with Two or More Origi-

nals”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

F Enter the desired number of L Press the {Auto Cycle} key.

prints for the second original

with the number keys.

M Press the {Print} key.

G Press the {q} key.

Note

❒ Repeat steps F and G for each

original.

❒ Up to 20 classes can be set.

H Press the [OK] key.

I Place the first original face down

on the exposure glass.

N After the first set is completed,

place the second original on the

exposure glass, and then press the

{Start} key.

J Press the {Start} key.

K Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

Note

❒ Repeat step N until you have

finished printing.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

keys. See p.24 “Adjusting the

Position of Printed Images”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Class Mode

Use the {Class} key to make sets of

prints from the same original. The

same numbers of prints are made for

each set.

B Select [Same-NO.] with the [→] or

{}} key.

R R R

C Press the [OK] key.

GRCLAS0E

D With the number keys, enter the

desired number of prints for each

set.

Note

❒ When you choose Class mode, Job

Separation mode is automatically

turned on. The job separator pulls

the top sheet of each set delivered

to the paper delivery tray to mark

the end of each printed set. The

next cycle begins automatically.

See p.77 “Job Separation ”.

E Press the {q} key.

❒ You can suspend Job Separation

mode whenever you set the Class

mode with the user tools. See “Au-

to Separate” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

A Press the {Class} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

F With the number keys, enter the

number of sets you wish to make.

Note

❒ Up to 99 sets can be selected for

an original.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Place one original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

I Press the {Start} key.

J Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

J Check the image position on the trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

K Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combine Originals

You can combine originals in two ways:

1 2

GRCOMB2E

❖ 2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 2 images

Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with the two

images placed side-by-side.

❖ 2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 4 images

Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with each im-

age duplicated (total of four images).

Note

❒ You can also use Memory Combine mode. See p.115 “Memory Combine”.

❒ You can set the machine to cancel Combine Originals mode after finishing

your print job with the user tools. See “Cancel Comb.” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

❒ Any image closer than 8mm, 0.32" to the leading edge of the first original will

not be printed. Any image closer than 4mm, 0.16" to the leading edge of the

second original will also not be printed. When the image is too close to the

leading edge, use copies of the originals with the image shifted at least 8mm,

0.32" for the first original (4mm, 0.16" for the second original) from the leading

edge.

❒ You can select different image settings for the first and second original.

❒ Make sure that the paper feed side plates touch the paper lightly and that the

paper size and direction shown on the panel display match the size and direc-

tion of paper actually placed in the paper feed tray. Either case can cause the

two original images not to appear in the proper position on prints.

❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used with the Combine

feature (2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 2 images).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

❖ Metric version

Original Size

A4K

100%

87%

B5K

115%

100%

82%

A5K

141%

122%

100%

87%

B6K

163%

141%

115%

100%

82%

A6K

200%

173%

141%

122%

100%

Paper Size A3L

B4L

A4L

B5L

A5L

71%

61%

71%

50%

58%

71%

❖ Inch version

Original Size

8¹/₂" × 11"K

100%

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K

129%

Paper Size

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

77%

100%

65%

100%

50%

65%

❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used with the Combine

feature (2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 4 images).

❖ Metric version

Original Size

A3L

B4L

A4L

71%

61%

50%

B5L

82%

71%

58%

50%

A5L

100%

87%

71%

61%

50%

B6L

115%

100%

82%

A6L

141%

122%

100%

87%

Paper

Size

A3L

B4L

A4L

B5L

A5L

50%

58%

50%

71%

58%

71%

❖ Inch version

Original Size

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"

8¹/₂" × 11"

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

Paper Size

11" × 17"L

50%

65%

50%

100%

77%

50%

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

50%

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combine Originals

❒ If a suitable reproduction ratio is not selected, images might not completely

appear on prints.

❒ Originals reading from left to right.

ZDZX160E

Reference

When you use the optional document feeder with this function, see p.127

“Combine Printing”.

A Place the first original face down.

ZDCH110E

Note

❒ When you place an original sideways (K), the top should be toward the

operation panel as shown above.

B Enter the number of prints using the number keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

C Check the print paper size and the reproduction ratio.

Note

❒ To have the machine choose a suitable ratio automatically, use Auto Mag-

nification mode. See p.31 “Auto Magnification”.

D Press the {Combine} key.

E Select [Combine 2] or [Quadruple] with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combine Originals

H The beeper sounds after the first original has been stored. Place the second

original face down.

ZDCH110E

I Press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] key. See

p.24 “Adjusting the Position of Printed Images”.

K Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Auto Combine Mode

B Enter the number of prints using

the number keys.

To use this function, you have to

select Auto Combine mode with

the user tools. See “Combine” on

p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

You can have images duplicated in

two ways:

1 1

C Check the print paper size and the

reproduction ratio.

GRACOM0E

❒ To have the machine choose a

suitable ratio automatically, use

Auto Magnification mode. See

p.31 “Auto Magnification”.

❖ 1 single-sided original → 1 single-sid-

ed print of 2 images

The original image is duplicated

twice on one print.

D Press the {Combine} key.

❖ 1 single-sided originals → 1 single-

sided print of 4 images

The original image is duplicated

four times on one print.

Reference

See p.63 “Combine Originals” for

details.

A Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

E Select [Repeat 2] or [Repeat 4] with

the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Combine Mode

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the {Start} key.

H Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

I Make your prints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Skip Feed Printing

You can increase the time between

printsusingthe{SkipFeed} key. Byde-

fault, when one sheet of paper is fed,

the drum rotates twice. However, you

can select the number of drum rota-

tions. This gives you a chance to re-

move prints one by one from the

paper delivery tray or insert one sheet

of paper between two prints. If you

use this function, you can also use pa-

per longer than the length limitation

of 432mm, 17.0".

C If necessary select the number of

drum rotations per sheet of paper

fed with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

Note

❒ For every sheet of paper fed, the

drum rotates twice by default. You

can change this default setting

with the user tools. See “No. of

Skip Feed” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

❒ You can also select the number

of rotations with the number

keys.

❒ You can select from 2 to 9 rota-

tions.

❒ The maximum length of paper in

❒ By default, the machine asks

you to confirm the number of

rotations. You can have this step

omitted by adjusting the user

tool settings. See “No. of Skip

Feed” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

Skip Feed mode is 460mm, 18.1".

❒ When you use paper longer than

432mm, 17.0", prints will not be de-

livered to the paper delivery tray

properly, so lower the paper deliv-

ery end plate and take out the

prints by hand.

D Press the [OK] key.

A Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

E Press the {Start} key.

B Press the {Skip Feed} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS030N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Skip Feed Printing

F Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

G Make your prints.

Note

❒ After printing is completed, the

Skip Feed setting returns to the

default.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Programs

You can store up to 9 frequently used

print job settings in machine memory

and recall them for future use.

D Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ The program numbers (1 to 9)

will be displayed in the panel

display.

Note

❒ Stored programs are not cleared

when you turn off the main switch.

❒ If a user program has been pro-

tected, that program number

will not appear in the panel dis-

play. To change a protected user

program, see p.73 “Protecting a

Program”.

❒ Stored programs cannot be delet-

ed. If you want to change a stored

program, overwrite it.

Storing a Program

❒ If all the user programs have

been protected, you cannot

store any settings. Press the

[Cancel] key.

A Make the print settings you want

to put into memory.

B Press the {Program} key.

E Select the program number you

want to store the settings in with

the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

C Select [Store] with the [→] or {}}

Note

key.

❒ You can also select the program

number with the number keys.

F Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ If this program number is al-

ready used, the machine asks

whether you wish to overwrite

it or not. Press the [Yes] or [No]

key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programs

E Press the [Select] key.

Protecting a Program

F Press the [OK] key.

If you want to prevent someone from

writing over your program, do the

following:

Removing Program Protection

A Press the {Program} key.

B Select [Protect] with the [→] or {}}

key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select the program number you

want to protect with the [←] [→]

or {~} {}} keys.

D Select the program number you

want to remove protection from

with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

Note

❒ Already protected program

numbers are shown with a

black background (e.g. A).

❒ Already protected program

numbers are shown with a

black background (e.g. A).

❒ You can also select the program

number with the number keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

E Press the [Select] key.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Press the [OK] key.

F Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

Recalling a Program

G Press the {Start} key.

A Press the {Program} key.

B Make sure that [Recall] is selected.

C Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ Programs that have been stored

beforehand are represented by a

number.

D Select the program number you

want to recall with the [←] [→] or

{~} {}} keys.

Note

❒ You can also select the program

number with the number keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security Mode

This function prevents others from

making prints of confidential docu-

ments from the master. For example,

if you want to print some documents

with sensitive information, use this

function after making your prints so

that nobody can access that master

again.

A Make your prints.

B Press the {Security} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS040N

C Press the [Yes] key.

Note

❒ If you set Security Mode, you

cannot make prints after finish-

ing one job even if you press the

{Proof} key or {Print} key. Press

the [Exit] key.

❒ You cannot cancel Security

mode even if you turn off the

main switch.

❒ Security mode is canceled when

you make a new master.

❒ You cannot pull out the drum

unit when in security mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Quality Start Mode

If the machine is not used for a long

period of time or you change the color

drum unit, the ink on the drum might

dry causing print quality to deterio-

rate. To solve this problem, you can

have the machine carry out a few idle

spins of the drum before a print run.

This will restore image quality and

save you having to make a repeat

print run.

Using Quality Start Manually

A Press the {Quality Start} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

You can use this feature in two ways:

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

❖ Manual Quality Start

Choose Quality Start mode for the

next print run manually using the

{Quality Start} key.

ZDZS050N

B Place your original on the expo-

sure glass or in the optional docu-

ment feeder.

❖ Auto Quality Start

Have the machine check automati-

cally how long ago it was used be- C Press the {Start} key.

fore each print run. If the machine

The drum unit idles.

has not been used for a long time,

Quality Start will be used for the

print job. By default, Auto Quality

Start mode is on. You can turn it off

with the user tools. See “Setting

Q.start” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

Note

❒ You can change the number of

spins in Manual Quality Start

mode with the user tools. See

D Make your prints.

“Idling for Q.start” on p.144 “4.

Mode Setting”.

❒ You can change the number of

spins after the fixed time period

has passed in Auto Quality Start

mode with the user tools. See “No.

of Q.start” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Job Separation

The print on the top of each print set in the paper delivery tray is pulled by the

job separator. This function is useful when you make two or more print sets.

GRJOBS0E

R CAUTION:

• While printing, do not touch the belt at the end of the paper delivery tray or

the job separator. Otherwise, an injury might occur.

Limitation

❒ In Job Separation mode, the following limitations apply.

❖ Metric version

Minimum paper size

Maximum paper weight

Paper delivery tray capacity

127.9g/m²

600 sheets (64g/m²)

Length: 210mm

Width: 128mm

❖ Inch version

Minimum paper size

Maximum paper weight

Paper delivery tray capacity

Length: 8.3"

Width: 5.1"

34 lb

600 sheets (17 lb)

Note

❒ When you use thin paper, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.

The job separator might tear the paper.

❒ If the job separator touches the print image, prints might be marked. In this

case, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.

❒ When you do not use Job Separation mode, you can select the machine con-

dition after each print set is fed out to the paper delivery tray with the user

tools. See “Auto Class” on p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

❒ If there are less than 10 sheets of paper in the paper delivery tray, the machine

may not be able to use Job Separation mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

A Press the {Job Separator} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS060N

B Make your prints.

Note

❒ After the last page of each print set is fed out to the paper delivery tray, the

job separator pulls the last sheet of each group in Job Separation mode. The

next job separation begins.

ZDZH110E

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conserving the Master

The machine automatically changes

the master length depending on the

paper size you use. This saves both

master and ink.

a = Images on the master

b = Masters

c = Conserved area

Limitation

❒ The optional document feeder is

required.

Note

❒ This function is turned on when

you use A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11" K or

B5K paper and you set 2 or more

originals in the optional document

feeder.

❒ This function does not apply to the

last page.

❒ You can cancel Master Saving

mode with the user tools. See

“Master length ” on p.144 “4. Mode

Setting”. You can also save master

using the optional A4, 8¹/₂" × 11"

drum. See p.134 “Changing the

Drum Size”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

On Line Printing

On Line printing allows you to use

this machine as a PC printer.

A Press the [fin PRNT] key.

Limitation

❒ The optional PC controller is re-

quired.

Note

❒ Before printing onto A5K, 5¹/₂" ×

8¹/₂" K, or non-standard size pa-

per, you need to select the paper

size with the [Pnt.Size] key.

When printing onto A5K, 5¹/₂" ×

8¹/₂" K, or non-standard paper

sizes

❒ When printing onto thick paper,

thin paper or special kinds of pa-

per from the paper feed tray, select

the paper type before pressing the

{On Line} key. See p.43 “Printing

onto Various Kinds of Paper”.

A Press the [Pnt.Size] key.

A Press the {On Line} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

B Select A5K, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K, or

Custom (non-standard) with

the [←] or [→] key.

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS070N

When a print job has not finished

printing while in online mode

If a print job has not finished print-

ing and the job is interrupted, the

machine cannot receive data from

the PC. To print the next job from

the PC, cancel the interrupted

print job.

C Press the [OK] key.

When printing onto standard

paper sizes or sizes other than

A5K, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K

A Refer to the PC controller man-

ual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

On Line Printing

Auto On Line

You can select whether the machine

automatically switches to On Line

mode when it receives data from a

PC.

Preparation

• The default setting for On Line

mode is On. However, you can

change the setting to Off if re-

quired.

• You can press the {Auto On Line}

key to switch Auto On Line on

or off. If the Auto On Line indi-

cator is lit, Auto On Line is ac-

tive. If the indicator is off, Auto

On Line is inactive.

• When the Auto On Line indica-

tor is lit, Auto On Line has pri-

ority when data is received

from a PC. If you want to pre-

vent the machine from inter-

rupting a print job when it

receives data from a PC, press

the {Auto On Line} key so the

Auto On Line indicator goes off

and Auto On Line becomes in-

active.

A Press the {Auto On Line} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS160N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Image Rotation

When your original setting direction is different from the paper direction, the

machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper di-

rection.

Note

❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used in Image Rotation

mode.

❖ Metric version

Original A3L

B4L

A4L

A4K

B5L

B5K

A5L✩ A5K✩

Paper

A4L

A4K

B5L

B5K

A5L

B6L

#: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-

per direction.

✩: Place these originals in the optional document feeder.

❖ Inch version

Original 11" × 17"

8¹/₂" × 14" 8¹/₂" × 11" 8¹/₂" × 11" 5¹/₂" 8¹/₂" 5¹/₂" ×8¹/₂"

L✩

K✩

Paper

8¹/₂" × 11"L --

8¹/₂" × 11"K

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" --

#: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-

per direction.

✩: Place these originals in the optional document feeder.

Note

❒ If you use Zoom mode, non-standard size originals or paper, the image will

not be rotated.

❒ It takes longer than usual to make masters in Image Rotation mode.

❒ You can cancel Image Rotation mode with the user tools. See “Auto Rotation”

on p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing Features

The optional editing function is required for this feature.

Make-up mode enables you to do more than just make an exact copy of the orig-

inal. A variety of editing and image processing functions allow you to quickly

and easily customize your prints.

Main Features

Command sheets allow you to create special effects without cutting and past-

ing—up to 4 commands can be given for an original. By combining Make-up

modes and printing with different color drums, you can create a variety of print-

ing effects.

Make-up Modes for Designated Areas

Mode

Sample

Designated Area

Command sheet/Original

(Closed area method)

Letter mode

WORLD

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

Photo mode

HAWAII

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Delete Area mode

Outline mode

Hello!

How are you?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Mode

Sample

Designated Area

Command sheet/Original

(Closed area method)

P./N. mode (Positive Neg-

ative mode)

BALLET

Solid mode (Image Pattern

mode)

BALLET

All Page Pattern mode

(Area Pattern mode)

LUNCH

All + Outline (Image Out-

line and Area Pattern

mode)

CAT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing Features

Make-up Modes for Outside Designated Areas

Mode

Sample

Undesignated Area

Command sheet/Original

Letter mode: The area out-

side designated areas is

printed in Letter mode.

HAWAII

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Photo mode: The area out-

side designated areas is

printed in Photo mode.

WORLD

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

World computer and

peripheral devices

are equipped with

Save Area mode: The area

outside the designated ar-

eas is deleted.

HAWAII

Please enjoy your

Summer vacation.

Outline mode: The area

outside the designated

area is printed in Outline

mode.

HAWAII

Note

❒ In Make-up mode, commands must be given for both designated areas and

areas outside the designated areas.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Background Patterns

A total of 164 background patterns is available in Make-up mode:

• 40 basic patterns

• 40 patterns similar to the basic patterns but with patterns elements at 4 times

the size.

• 80 variants based on 90° rotations of all the basic and enlarged patterns.

• 4 registered user patterns.

* Paper Feed Direction

Note

❒ The basic patterns are numbered 1 to 40.

❒ You can make your own make-up background patterns with the user tools.

See p.163 “5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing

Command sheets are fed first so that the machine can recognize the areas of the

original which are to be edited as designated areas.

Command Sheets

The command sheet is a sheet of paper designating the areas to be edited. Com-

mand sheets must be made on white or translucent paper, and should be the

same size as the original.

Do not designate areas within 5 mm, 0.2" from the top.

Note

❒ Poor quality paper (such as newsprint, recycled paper, etc.) should not be

used for command sheets because any dark spots or streaks will be read as

designated areas.

❒ Do not use blotting paper or other absorbent paper for command sheets be-

cause ink might leak through the paper and get the exposure glass dirty.

Making a Command Sheet

There are two ways of designating areas: the diagonal line method and the

closed area method.

-Features

• You can combine up to 4 command sheets when making a master.

• You cannot use both the closed and diagonal line method on the same com-

mand sheet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

• There is no limit to the number of areas you can designate on a single com-

mand sheet.

• If designated areas on two or more command sheets overlap, the last com-

mand sheet will apply to the overlapping portion.

• If you use Outline mode for letter images with a thickness of less than 3mm,

0.12", the print image might come out as expected.

-Notes

The image might differ depending on how the designated area is drawn, so re-

member the following when making the command sheet.

Designated area

Area recognized

Preferred designated area

Part of the designated area is

surrounded by 3 sides of the en-

tire area.

Make a space of at least 2mm,

0.08", in front of the area surround-

ed by 3 sides (relative to the feed

direction).

1, 2 = 2mm, 0.08"

Double line pattern.

Only the outer line is Make a gap of at least 2mm, 0.08"

recognized. in width.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing

Designated area

Area recognized

Preferred designated area

The designated area is sur-

rounded by 3 sides of another

designated area.

Make a space of at least 2mm, 0.08"

in front of the area surrounded by

3 sides (relative to the feeding di-

rection).

1, 2 = 2mm, 0.08"

Non-closed line

Designate the area with a closed

line.

Diagonal line method

Note

❒ A diagonal line must be drawn through the area that you wish to edit.

A Put the command sheet on top of the original.

ZM-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

B Draw a line using a felt tip pen (black, red or blue) with a thickness of at

least 1mm.

ZM-21

Note

❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.

❒ The diagonal line can be drawn from left to right or vice versa.

❒ Draw the line at least 2mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the whole

image can be recognized.

GRCOMM1E

a, b, c, d = 2mm, 0.08"

❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2mm, 0.08",

from any neighboring image.

GRCOMM2E

a, b, c = 2mm, 0.08"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing

Closed area method

Note

❒ The line designating the area must be a closed loop.

A Put the command sheet on top of the original.

ZM-20

B Using a black, red, or blue felt tip pen, draw a line around the area to des-

ignate. The line should have a thickness of at least 1mm.

ZM-26

Note

❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.

❒ Draw the line at least 2mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the whole

image can be recognized.

a = Line marking the designated area

b = 2mm, 0.08"

c = Image within the designated area

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2mm, 0.08",

from any neighboring image.

GRCOMM4E

a = 2mm, 0.08"

b = Neighboring image

c = Line marking the designated area

d = Image within the designated area

Command Sheets and Finished Prints

The following illustrations will help you understand how to draw a command

sheet.

❖ Drawing a command sheet using a diagonal line

The diagonal line method is easy to use for designating rectangular areas. It is

also more precise, but it is difficult to use for designating complex areas.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing

❖ Drawing a command sheet using a closed line

fruit

The closed line method is easier to use for complex areas, but it is less precise. It

also takes longer to draw a command sheet with the closed line method.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Make-up Printing

A Press the {Make-Up} key.

E Select the mode for the first com-

mandsheetwiththe[←][→]or{~}

{}} {|} {{} keys.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS080N

B Make sure that [1] is selected.

F Press the [OK] key.

Then press the [OK] key.

G If necessary, select the pattern for

the first command sheet with the

{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key. Then

press the [OK] key.

C Select the frame shape with the

H If necessary, select the size and

direction of the pattern you se-

lected in step G with the [←] [→]

or {~} {}} keys.

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

D Press the [OK] key.

I Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ Follow steps B – I for the other

command sheets.

❒ You can select a pattern regis-

tered with the user tools for

only one command sheet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Printing

❒ To change the value entered,

pressthe{Clear/Stop}keyanden-

ter the new value.

M If you have selected Photo mode,

select the dot pattern and the con-

trast with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

J After you have finished designat-

ing modes for all the command

sheets, select [Outside Area] with

the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

K Select the mode for the outside

area with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

Note

❒ Four dot patterns settings are

available:

• Setting 1: clearest

• Setting 2: clearer than setting 3

• Setting 3: clearer than setting 4

L Press the [OK] key.

• Setting 4: clearer than the

standard setting

Note

❒ When you select Photo mode

for both inside and outside ar-

eas, you cannot select different

dot patterns and contrast.

N Press the [OK] key.

❒ When you want to confirm your

settings, press the {Make-Up} key

twice. Then press the [OK] key

repeatedly until the panel dis-

play reaches the setting you

want to confirm.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

O Place the first command sheet

face down on the exposure glass

and press the {Start} key.

The beeper sounds after the com-

mand sheet is scanned.

Note

❒ Repeat step O for the other com-

mand sheets.

P Place the original face down on

the exposure glass or face up into

the document feeder and press

the {Start} key.

Note

❒ If a command sheet or original

misfeeds from the document

feeder, remove the misfed sheet

or original and reset it in the

document feeder.

❒ It is not necessary to reset the

previous command sheets or

original.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Samples

-Sample 1

^ACommand Sheet No. 1, Frame shape , Designated area: Delete Area mode

^BOutside area: Letter mode

^CPrint

ZM-50

1. Original

2. Command sheet No.1

3. Print

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

-Sample 2

^ACommand Sheet No. 1, Frame shape/, Designated area: All + Outline No. 30

^BCommand Sheet No. 2 Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern No.

^COutside area: Fn1

^DPrint

ZM-51

1. Original

3. Command sheet No.2

2. Command sheet No.1

4. Print

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make-up Samples

-Sample 3

^APrint the original as it is

^BChange the drum unit for color printing

^CCommand Sheet No. 1, Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern

No. 39

^DOutside area: Letter mode

^EPrint

ZM-52

1. Original

2. Command sheet No.1

3. Print

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Original Storage

You can store frequently used origi-

nals in machine memory and then

easily recall them later to make prints

whenever they are needed.

A Press the {Original Storage} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Preparation

• You can store up to 8 Original

Storage settings in machine

memory.

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

• The number of Original Storage

settings you can store depends

on the type of originals.

ZDZS170N

B Select [Store] with the [→] or {}}

• You may not be able to store

Original Storage settings for

some types of original.

key.

• The machine remembers Origi-

nal Storage settings even after

the power to the machine has

been switched off or the {Clear

Modes/Energy Saver} key has

been pressed to clear.

C Press the [OK] key.

Storing Originals

D Select the desired number to store

Store the print images of the originals

you want to use frequently.

with the [←][→] or {~}{}} keys.

Note

❒ You can use this feature with:

• Reproduction Ratio

• Selecting Original Modes

• Adjusting the Image Density of

Prints

• Edge Erase

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Original Storage

E Place the original on the exposure

glass as shown, then press the

{Start} key.

Non-standard size originals

A If you place non-standard size

original, this display will be

shown.

Press the [OK] key.

ZDCH110E

Note

❒ If print images for an original

have already been stored in ma-

chine memory, check the stored

images and choose whether to

overwrite them or not. To over-

write the images, press the [Yes]

key. To keep the images, press

the [No] key.

B Enter the vertical length with

the number key, and then

press the {#} key.

C Enter the horizontal width

with the number key, and then

press the {#} key.

TPES580E

D Place your originals on the ex-

posure glass, and then press

the {Start} key.

❒ If you select overwrite, the doc-

ument stored in memory will be

erased unless it is write protect-

ed.

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Selecting Stored Originals

Protecting Stored Originals

To select the images of originals that

have been stored in machine memo-

ry, do the following:

If you want to protect the images of

originals stored in machine memory,

do the following:

A Press the {Original Storage} key.

Protecting Originals

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

A Press the {Original Storage} key.

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

Economy Mode

Original Storage

ZDZS170N

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

B Select [Select] with the [←][→] or

ZDZS170N

{~}{}} keys.

B Select [Protect] with the [→] or {}}

key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select the number of the stored

originalwiththe[←][→]or{~}{}}

keys.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select the number of the original

to be protected with the [←][→] or

{~}{}} keys.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Press the {Start} key.

E Press the [Select] key.

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Original Storage

F Press the [OK] key.

Deleting Stored Originals

Removing Original Protection

If you want to delete the images of

originals stored in machine memory,

do the following:

A Press the {Original Storage} key.

Important

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

❒ You cannot restore the images

once they have been deleted.

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

A Press the {Original Storage} key.

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

ZDZS170N

Economy Mode

Original Storage

B Select [Protect] with the [→] or {}}

key.

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS170N

B Select [Delete] with the [→] or {}}

key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Press the [Cancel] key.

C Select the number of the original

to be deleted with the [←][→] or

{~}{}} keys.

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

D Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

TPES580E

Note

❒ Press the [No] key if you do not

wish to delete the Stored Origi-

nal.

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Overlay

The machine can merge two different

originals onto the same print paper.

❖ Storage overlay

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Two types of merging are available:

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

❖ Overlay

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Combines the images of originals

stored in Original Storage with the

originals placed on the machine.

GROVER0E

Two different originals are merged

onto the same print paper.

Storage Overlay

❖ Format

A Press the {Overlay} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

GROVER1E

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

The image of the original which is

copied first will become the back-

ground image for all copies. The

following originals will be copied

with this background.

ZDZS090N

B Select [Storage overlay] with the

[←][→] or {~}{}} keys.

❖ On Line overlay

When your machine is equipped

with the optional PC controller, an

image sent from a PC and the orig-

inal image can be merged onto the

same print paper.

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

C Press the [OK] key.

C Place you originals and print start

with your PC.

Note

Limitation

❒ If the one of the stored originals

already chosen, the display in

step C does not show. Skip to

step D.

❒ The optional PC controller is re-

quired to use On Line Overlay

mode.

❒ In order to get a correct print

image, the size of the original

and the PC image should be

identical.

D Press the [OK] key.

E Place your originals, and then

press the {Start} key.

Overlay Format

On Line Overlay

A Press the {Overlay} key.

A Press the {On Line} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS090N

ZDZS070N

B Select one of Image Overlay

modes with the [←] [→] or {~}

{}} keys.

B Press the {Overlay} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Make-Up

Auto On Line

Darker 2

Over lay

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS090N

C Press the [OK] key.

D Place your originals, and then

press the {Start} key.

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Overlay

Placing originals on the exposure

glass

Placing originals in the optional

document feeder

A Place the first original on the

A Place originals in the docu-

exposure glass.

ment feeder.

ZDCH110E

ZDCH120E

B Press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ To avoid originals misfeed-

ing, fan the originals before

placing them in the docu-

ment feeder.

❒ When you select [Format] in

step B, the original for the

template should be placed

first.

B Press the {Start} key.

❒ To change the background

image in Format mode, press

the {q} key. Then place the

next original for the template

and press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ When you select [Format] in

step B, the original for the

template should be on the

top.

C Place the next original on the

exposure glass.

❒ To change the background

image in Format mode, press

the{q}key.Thensetthenext

original for the template and

press the {Start} key.

D Press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ When you select [Format] in

step B, repeat steps C and D.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Date Stamp

Use this function to have the date

stamped on prints.

DateStamp Print image

direction

on the dis-

play

Before you use this function, you

have to set the machine's internal

clock with the user tools. See p.153

“1-6 Time Setting”.

Limitation

❒ The font size of the date cannot be

changed.

❒ If you select Page Stamp and Date

Stamp together, the last stamp di-

rection selected takes priority.

Note

❒ The default format of Date Stamp

is “Month Day Year”. You can

change this setting with the user

tools. See “Date Style Set” on p.148

“5. Stamp”.

A Press the {Stamp} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

❒ You can edit the Date Stamp posi-

tion. See p.160 “5-7 Position

(Date)”.

Normal

Darker 1

Make-Up

Auto On Line

Darker 2

❒ The Date Stamp directions on the

panel display and actual print im-

ages are as follows.

Over lay

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS100N

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Date Stamp

B Make sure that [Date] is selected.

G Place your original, and then

press the {Start} key.

Placing your original (K) on the

exposure glass

C Press the [OK] key.

A Place your original as shown in

the illustration.

D Select the desired position and di-

rection withthe[←][→]or{~} {}}

keys.

ZDCH110E

Placing your originals (K) in the

optional document feeder

E Press the [OK] key.

F Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

A Place your originals as shown

in the illustration.

TPES580E

Note

❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish

to set the other Stamp functions.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ To avoid originals misfeed-

ing, fan the originals before

placing them in the docu-

ment feeder.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Page Stamp

Use this function to have page num-

bers stamped on prints.

❒ You can edit the preset page num-

bering position with the user tools.

See p.161 “5-10 Position (Page)”.

❒ [P1, P2,…, P5] is the default format.

You can change this default setting

with the user tools. See

“Type(Page)” on p.148 “5. Stamp”.

A Press the {Stamp} key.

–1 –

Image Density

Stamp

GRPAGE0E

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Three numbering formats are avail-

able:

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

• P1, P2,....., P5

• 1/5, 2/5,....., 5/5

• -1-, -2-,....., -3-

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS100N

Limitation

❒ The size and font of Page Stamp

cannot be changed.

B Select [Page] with the [→] or {}}

key.

❒ If you select Page Stamp and Date

Stamp together, the last stamp di-

rection selected takes priority.

Note

❒ Check the following table for the

relationship between the Page

Stamp direction on the panel dis-

play and the actual print image.

C Press the [OK] key.

PageStamp Print image

direction

on the dis-

play

D Select the desired format with the

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

P.1

1/5

–1–

GRPPOS6E

–1–

GRPPOS4E

GRPPOS7E

GRPPOS5E

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page Stamp

C Enter the first page number

E Press the [OK] key.

withthe[←][→]or{~}{}}keys.

If you selected [P1,P2] or [-1-,-2-]

A Enter the first page number

withthe[←][→]or{~}{}}keys.

Note

❒ You can also enter the page

number with the number

keys.

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

Note

❒ You can also enter the page

number with the number

keys.

D Press the [OK] key.

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

F Select the desired orientation

with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

B Press the [OK] key.

If you selected [1/5,2/5]

A Enter the last page number

withthe[←][→]or{~}{}}keys.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

Note

❒ You can also enter the page

number with the number

keys.

TPES580E

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish

to set the other Stamp modes.

B Press the [OK] key.

I Place your original, and then

press the {Start} key.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Placing your originals (K) on the

exposure glass

A Place the first original as

shown in the illustration.

ZDCH110E

Note

❒ Repeat step I for the other

originals.

Placing your originals (K) in the

optional document feeder

A Place your originals as shown

in the illustration.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ The first original should be

on the top.

❒ To avoid originals misfeed-

ing, fan the originals before

placing them in the docu-

ment feeder.

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stamp

B Select [Stamp] with the [←] [→] or

{~} {}} keys.

Priority

Preliminary

Confidential

GRSTAM0E

One of the following 3 messages can

be stamped on prints.

C Press the [OK] key.

CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

D Select the desired message with

the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

PRELIMINARY

Limitation

❒ Only one message can be stamped

at a time.

Note

❒ You can change some Stamp set-

tings (size, density, or position)

with the user tools. See “Size”,

“Stamp Density”, “Stamp Posi-

tion” on p.148 “5. Stamp”.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Select the page to be stamped

with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

❒ The message “CONFIDENTIAL”

is selected as a default. You can

change this setting with the user

tools. See “Type” on p.148 “5.

Stamp”.

A Press the {Stamp} key.

Image Density

Stamp

Lighter

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

G Press the [OK] key.

Make-Up

Over lay

Auto On Line

Economy Mode

Original Storage

Edge Erase

Skip Feed

Job Separator

ZDZS100N

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

H Select the stamp position with the

Placing your originals (K) in the

optional document feeder

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

A Place your originals as shown

in the illustration.

I Press the [OK] key.

J Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ To avoid originals misfeed-

ing, fan the originals before

placing them in the docu-

ment feeder.

TPES580E

Note

❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish

to set the other Stamp modes.

K Place your original and press the

{Start} key.

Placing your original (K) on the

exposure glass (contact glass)

A Set your original as shown in

the illustration.

ZDCH110E

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine

You can combine originals in four ways:

❖ 4 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 4 images

4 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 4 original images on one

side.

❖ 8 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 8 images

8 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 8 original images on one

side.

❖ 16 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 16 images

16 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 16 original images on

one side.

❖ Repeating an image over the entire print

1 original image is printed repeatedly.

Note

❒ A separation line between images can be printed with the user tools. See

“Comb. Sep. Line” on p.144 “4. Mode Setting”.

Combining onto a Single–sided Print

❖ 4 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 4 images

GRMCOM0E

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

❖ 8 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 8 images

GRMCOM1E

❖ 16 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 16 images

10 11 12

13 14 15 16

GRMCOM2E

Limitation

❒ To use “16 one-sided originals → 1 one-sided print of 16 images” mode, the

optional document feeder is required.

❒ If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is corrected within the

range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the im-

age might not be copied.

❒ The machine cannot copy originals different in size and direction.

Note

❒ The number of originals printed (combined) can be 4, 8, or 16.

❒ In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This

reproduction ratio depends on the print paper size and the number of origi-

nals.

❒ When the original is placed at a different direction from the print paper, the

machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the print pa-

per direction.

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine

❒ You can set the machine to cancel Memory Combine mode after finishing

your print job with the user tools. See “Cancel Comb.” on p.144 “4. Mode Set-

ting”.

❒ Refer to the following table when you select the original and paper sizes.

❖ Placing originals in the optional document feeder (metric version)

Original A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

A5KL

Paper

A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

❖ Placing originals in the optional document feeder (inch version)

Original 11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

8¹/₂" × 5¹/₂"KL

Paper

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" L

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

❖ Placing originals on the exposure glass (metric version)

Original A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

Paper

A3L

B4L

A4KL

B5KL

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

❖ Placing originals on the exposure glass (inch version)

Original 11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

Paper

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 14"L

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" L

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.

You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.

A Press the {Combine} key.

B Select [Memory Combine] with the [→] or {}} key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select your desired mode.

E Press the [OK] key.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine

F Place your originals.

Placing your original (K) on the exposure glass

A Place your original as shown in the illustration.

ZDCH110E

Placing your originals (K) in the optional document feeder

A Place your originals as shown in the illustration.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ The first original should be on the top.

❒ To avoid originals misfeeding, fan the originals before placing them in

the document feeder.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

G Press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ Even if the number of originals is less than the number required in the se-

lected mode, prints can be made as shown in the illustration. In this case,

press the {q} key after all the originals have been scanned.

GRMCOM3E

❒ When placing an original on the exposure glass or one sheet at a time in the

optional document feeder, repeat steps F and G. After placing the last orig-

inal, press the {q} key, and then the {Start} key.

Repeat

GRREPE0E

Limitation

❒ Part of the repeated image might not be printed depending on the paper size,

direction and reproduction ratio.

Note

❒ The number of repeated images depends on the original and paper size, and

reproduction ratio.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine

❒ Check the following table for the relationship between the direction of the

original and paper, and the number of repeated images.

❖ Example: copying A4 L originals onto A3L paper.

The number of repeated im- Reproduction ratio

ages

Print image

71%

GRREPE3E

❖ Example: copying A5L originals placed in the optional document feeder onto

A3L paper.

Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio

16 50%

Print image

GRREPE4E

❖ Example: copying 8¹/₂" × 11" K originals onto 11" × 17" L paper.

Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio

100%

Print image

GRREPE5E

❖ Example: copying A5L originals placed in the optional document feeder onto

A4K paper.

Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio

50%

Print image

GRREPE6E

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

A Press the {Combine} key.

B Select [Memory Combine] with the [→] or {}} key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Select [Repeat] with the [→] or {}} key.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Select the reproduction ratio.

Reference

See p.29 “Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios”.

G Set your original.

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Combine

Placing your original (K) on the exposure glass

A Place your original as shown in the illustration.

ZDCH110E

Placing your originals (K) in the optional document feeder

A Place your originals as shown in the illustration.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ To avoid originals misfeeding, fan the originals before placing them in

the document feeder.

H Press the {Start} key.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Optional Functions

Optional Document Feeder

Insert a stack of originals in the docu-

ment feeder. It will be fed automati-

cally.

The following original sizes placed in

the document feeder can be detected.

Metric version

A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL,

B5 KL, A5KL

11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" × 14"

L, 8¹/₂" × 11"KL, 5¹/₂"

× 8¹/₂"KL

Inch version

Originals

Placing the following originals in the

document feeder might cause mis-

feeds or damage to the originals.

Reference

Place the following kinds of originals

on the exposure glass:

• Originals heavier than 128g/m², 34 lb

For the original sizes placed on the

exposure glass can be detected, see

p.13 “Originals”.

• Originals lighter than 52g/m², 14 lb

Note

• Originals smaller than 148mm ×

❒ Place originals after correction flu-

id and ink have completely dried.

Not taking this precaution could

mark the exposure glass and cause

marks to be printed.

210mm, 5.9" × 8.3"

• Originals larger than 297mm ×

864mm, 11.6" × 34.0"

• Stapled or clipped originals

For standard printing functions, set

originals as shown below.

• Perforated or torn originals

• Curled, folded, or creased origi-

nals

• Originals with any kind of coating,

such as thermal fax paper, art pa-

per, aluminum foil, carbon paper,

or conductive paper

• Bound originals such as books

• Damaged originals

GRSETT1E

• Originals with glue on them

• Pasted originals

If the original is placed in a different

direction from the print paper, the

machine automatically rotates the

original image by 90° to match the

print paper direction.

• Originals written in pencil

• Thin originals that are a little stiff

• Originals with index tabs

You cannot place originals of differ-

ent sizes at the same time.

• Transparent originals such as OHP

transparencies or translucent pa-

per

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Functions

When you use thin originals, place

one original at a time in the document

feeder or place them on the exposure

glass.

Note

❒ To avoid jamming, fan the orig-

inals before placing them in the

document feeder.

The first 8mm, 0.32", of the leading

edge and the last 2mm, 0.08" of the

trailing edge cannot be printed. Make

sure the leading edge margin is at

least 8mm, 0.32", and the trailing edge

margin is at least 2mm, 0.08".

❒ The guides must fit snugly

against both sides of the stack.

C Adjust print settings as necessary,

and then press the {Start} key.

Do not stack originals above the limit

mark.

Placing Originals

A Adjust the guide to the original

size.

B Insert the aligned originals face

D Make your prints.

up into the document feeder.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ If the next original has been

placed in the document feeder

before the machine stops, that

original is fed automatically

and a trial print is delivered to

the paper delivery tray after the

print of the first original is com-

pleted. Check the image posi-

tion on the trial print of the next

original. If necessary, make

proof prints using the {Proof}

key to check the image position

again.

❒ To avoid originals misfeeding,

fan the originals before placing

them in the document feeder.

Limitation

❒ Approximately 50 originals

(80g/m², 21 lb) can be inserted

at one time in the document

feeder. The first (top) original

will be fed first.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Document Feeder

D Press the {Combine} key.

Combine Printing

Reference

See p.63 “Combine Originals” for

details.

A Insert the two originals face up.

E Select [Combine 2] or [Quadruple]

with the [←][→] or {~} {}} keys.

ZDCH120E

Note

❒ The first original will be printed

on the left side of the paper.

❒ To avoid originals misfeeding,

fan the originals before placing

them in the document feeder.

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the {Start} key.

B Enter the number of prints with

the number keys.

H Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

C Check the print paper size and the

reproduction ratio.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the[Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

❒ To have the machine choose a

suitable ratio automatically, use

Auto Magnification mode. See

p.31 “Auto Magnification”.

❒ After the first original has been

stored, the second original is

fed.

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Functions

❒ If you place only one original,

the beeper sounds after the first

original has been scanned in.

Place the second original and

any print settings you require.

Then press the {Start} key.

E Press the {q} key.

Manual Class Mode with Two

or More Originals

Reference

See p.59 “Manual Class Mode with

two or More Originals”.

F Enter the desired number of

prints for the second original

with the number keys.

A Press the {Class} key.

G Press the {q} key.

B Select [Manual] with the [→] or {}}

Note

key.

❒ Repeat steps F and G for each

original.

❒ Up to 20 classes can be set.

H Press the [OK] key.

I Place your originals face up in the

document feeder.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Enter the desired number of

prints for the first original with

the number keys.

ZDCH120E

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Document Feeder

Note

M Press the {Print} key.

❒ To avoid originals misfeeding,

fan the originals before placing

them in the document feeder.

❒ The originals are fed from the

top of the stack. Make sure that

the originals are placed in the

correct sequence with the first

on the top.

J Press the {Start} key.

K Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

L Press the {Auto Cycle} key.

Note

❒ In Auto Cycle mode, printing

starts automatically after a trial

print is delivered.

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Functions

Color Printing Using the Optional Color

Drum

Color drum units are available as op-

tions in addition to the standard black

unit. For making color prints, a sepa-

rate drum unit is necessary for each

color.

Changing the Color Drum Unit

A Open the front door.

B Lower the drum unit lock lever

Note

(B1).

❒ If the ink on the color drum dries,

use the Quality Start mode. See

p.76 “Quality Start Mode”.

Making Color Prints

A Make sure that the color drum in-

dicator is lit.

Note

❒ Make sure the green light be-

side the drum unit lock lever is

on before sliding out the drum.

If the light is off, close the front

door, wait for five seconds, and

then open.

B Press the {Start} key.

C Check the image position on the

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the [Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

D Make your prints.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Printing Using the Optional Color Drum

C Pull the drum unit handle out F Insert the color drum unit along

slowly (B2).

the guide rail.

TPEH290E

G Lower the drum unit lock lever

D Lift the upper drum stay (B3) a lit-

tle to unlock the drum unit, and

then pull out the drum unit while

holding the drum unit handle

(B2) and the upper drum stay (B3).

(B1) of the inserted drum.

H Slide in the drum unit until it

locks in position.

Important

❒ Be careful not to let the drum

unit fall.

E Make sure the optional color

drum lock is securely set.

TPEH091E

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Functions

I Lift drum unit lock lever (B1).

A Prepare the two originals. Place

the first original on the exposure

glass.

TPEH081E

J Close the front door.

ZDCH110E

Note

B Enter the number of prints with

❒ Make sure that the Open Cov-

er/Unit indicator turns off, and

the Color Drum indicator turns

on.

the number keys.

Printing in Two Colors

After printing in one color, you can

print in another color on the same

side of the print.

C Press the {Start} key.

GRCOLO0E

Note

❒ Let the ink on the prints dry for a

while before printing on them

again.

D Check the image position on the

❒ If the prints are not dry, the paper

feed roller might become dirty. In

this case, wipe the roller with a

cloth.

trial or proof print.

❒ If the image position is not cor-

rect, adjust it using the[Image =]

key. See p.24 “Adjusting the Po-

sition of Printed Images”.

❒ You cannot print in two colors at

one time.

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Printing Using the Optional Color Drum

E Press the {Print} key.

F Remove the prints from the paper

delivery tray and place them on

the paper feed tray again as

shown in the illustration.

G Change the drum unit. See p.130

“Changing the Color Drum Unit”.

TPEH101E

H Place the second original and

press the {Start} key.

I Check the image position.

J Press the {Print} key.

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Functions

Changing the Drum Size

To save costs on master rolls and ink,

you can shorten the length of each

master by changing to an optional

smaller drum.

Printing Area (At 23°C/73°F,

65% RH)

❖ Metric version

A3 drum

More than 290 × 410mm,

11.4" × 16.2"

A4 drum

More than 290 × 200mm

❖ Inch version

11" × 17"

drum

More than 290 × 420mm,

11.4" × 16.6"

8¹/₂" × 11"

drum

More than 11.4" × 7.8"

Master Cut Length

A3 drum…320mm × 530mm, 12.5" ×

20.9", 255 masters/roll

11" × 17" drum…320 × 540mm, 12.5" ×

21.3", 245 masters/roll

Optional A4, 8¹/₂"

11"

drum…320mm × 325mm, 12.5" ×

12.8", 410 masters/roll

Note

❒ For changing the drum unit, see

p.130 “Changing the Color Drum

Unit”.

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Combination Chart

Combination Chart

This combination chart shows which modes can be used together.

✩

means that these modes can be used together.

means that these modes cannot be used together.

means that these modes cannot be used together (the function chosen sec-

ond takes priority).

means that these modes cannot be used together (the function chosen first

takes priority).

Function chosen second

Letter, Pho- -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * ✩ *

to, Let-

1 1

ter/Photo,

Pencil, Tint

mode

Economy

mode

✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Auto Cycle

✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Preset Re-

duce/En-

large

✩ ✩ ✩ -- * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * ✩ *

1 1 1 1

Zoom

✩ ✩ ✩ * -- * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * ✩ *

1 1 1

Auto Magni- ✩ ✩ ✩ * * -- * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * ✩ * ✩ *

fication Selec-

tion

1 1

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combination Chart

Function chosen second

Directional

Magnifica-

tion (%)

✩ ✩ ✩ * * * -- * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * ✩ *

1 1 1

Directional

Magnifica-

tion (size)

✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * ✩ *

1 1 1 1

Combine

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * ✩ * ✩ *

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

Originals (2

Images on

one sheet)

Combine

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * -- * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * ✩ * ✩ *

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

Originals (4

Images on

one sheet)

Memory

Combine

mode (4 Orig-

inals)

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * -- * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * * * ✩ *

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2

Memory

Combine

mode (8 Orig-

inals)

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * -- * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * * * ✩ *

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2

Memory

Combine

mode (16

Originals)

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * * * ✩ *

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2

Edge Erase

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * ✩ *

All Class

mode

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *

1 1 1

Manual Class ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * -- * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *

mode 1 1

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combination Chart

Function chosen second

Class mode ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *

1 1 1

Job Separa- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

tion

Overlay

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- * * * * * * * * ✩ *

2 2 2 2 2

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * -- -- * * * * * * ✩ *

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Storage Over- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * -- ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * ✩ *

lay 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2

Date Stamp ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * ✩ -- ✩ ✩ * ✩ * ✩ *

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Page Stamp ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * ✩ ✩ -- ✩ * ✩ * ✩ *

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * ✩ ✩ -- * ✩ * ✩ *

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * ✩ ✩ * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * * -- * * ✩ *

1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

* ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * -- -- ✩ *

2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2

Original Stor- * ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * * * * ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ * * * ✩ * * * * -- ✩ ✩ *

1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

Form

Stamp

Repeat

Make-up

age

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2 2

Skip Feed

On Line

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩

* ✩ ✩ * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ✩ * * * * * * * * * ✩ --

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Image Rota- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ X ✩ X X X X ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ X X X X X X X X X ✩ X

tion

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Combination Chart

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. User Tools

Accessing the User Tools

The user tools allow you to customize

various default settings. This section

is intended for the machine adminis-

trator.

Note

❒ [Next]: Press to go to the next

page.

❒ [Prev.]: Press to go back to the

A Press the {User Tools} key.

previous page.

B Press the [OK] key.

C Search for the desired user tool

number of each function with

the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

D Press the [OK] key.

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

Using the number keys

ZDZS110N

A Enter the desired user tool

number (1 to 7) with the num-

ber keys.

B Select the desired user tools

menu. See p.141 “User Tools

Menu”.

Using the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}

key

A Search for the desired user tool

number (1 to 7) with the {~},

{}}, {|}, or {{} key.

B Press the [OK] or {q} key.

C Enter the desired user tool

number of each function with

the number keys.

D Press the [OK] or {q} key.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

C Change the settings by following

the instructions on the panel dis-

play, and then press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key before

pressing the [OK] key. Then en-

ter the new value.

❒ [Cancel]: Press to return to the

previous menu without chang-

ing any data.

D Press the {User Tools} key to return

to the standby display.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

Note

❒ The settings are not canceled

even if the main switch is

turned off or the {Clear Modes/En-

ergy Saver} key is pressed.

❒ You can also return to the stand-

by display by pressing the [Can-

cel] key.

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

Reference

For accessing the user tools, see p.139 “Accessing the User Tools”.

1. System

No.

Mode

Description

Auto Reset

The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after

your job is finished. The automatic reset time can be set from 1 to

5 minutes or off (0 minutes).

Note

❒ Default: Off

R. Cntr. Display

Use to display the total number of masters and prints.

Note

❒ A trial print delivered to the paper delivery tray after press-

ing the {Start} key will not be counted.

Reset R. Counter Choose whether the total number of masters and prints is reset.

Note

❒ Default: Not clear

mm/inch

Choose the units of measurement shown on the panel display.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Metric version: mm

Inch version: inch

Language on LCD The language used for panel display messages can be selected.

Note

❒ Default: English

Time Setting

Use to set the machine's internal clock.

Note

❒ The clock must be adjusted if you change the clock to daylight

saving time/summer time, or return to standard time.

Reference

For setting the clock, see p.153 “1-6 Time Setting”.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

No.

Mode

Description

Data Print

Use to print out the following data.

Note

❒ Available settings:

•

Log Data (Number of prints made, how many times paper

misfeeds occur and so on.)

Reset Counters (Number of prints and master made under

each user code.)

Store Class (Registered number of students in each class.)

Energy Saving

You can set the time until the Energy Saver mode starts.

Note

❒ Default: 3 Min. (minutes)

2. Set Operat'n Mode

No.

Mode

Description

Min. Quantity

The minimum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.

Example: If you specify 20 as the minimum number of prints, runs

of 20 or more prints will be accepted, print runs of less than 20

prints will not be accepted.

Note

❒ Default: 0

Max. Quantity

The maximum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.

Note

❒ Default: 9999

CopyCount Dis- The counter can be set to show the number of prints made (Up),

play

or the number of prints left to be made (Down).

Note

❒ Default: Down

Panel Beeper

Turns the beeper on or off.

Note

❒ Default: STD. (standard)

❒ Available settings:

•

ALL OFF (The beeper does not sound when you press keys

or when warning messages appear on the panel display.)

STD. (When you press a key, the beeper does not sound.

When warning messages appear on the panel display, the

beeper sounds.)

•

ALL ON (The beeper sounds when you press a key or

when warning messages appear on the panel display.)

LCD Contrast

You can adjust the brightness of the panel display.

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

3. Initial Setting

No.

Mode

Description

Paper Type

Specifies the paper type at power on.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (Standard)

MSTR Makg.

Density

Specifies the image density at power on.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (Standard)

Original Priority Specifies the original mode at power on.

Note

❒ Default: Letter

Reproduct'n Ra- Adjust a fixed reproduction ratio between 50 and 200%.

tio

Note

❒ Default:

•

Metric version: 71%, 82%, 87%, 93%, 100%, 115%, 122%,

141%

Inch version: 65%, 74%, 77%, 93%, 100%, 121%, 129%,

155%

Reference

For setting the ratios, see p.154 “3-4 Reproduction Ratio”.

Class Enter No.

Before using All Class or Auto Class mode, register the number

of students in each class with this function.

Note

❒ You can store student numbers for up to 9 grades with 12

classes in each, giving a maximum of 108 classes. Each class

can have up to 9999 students.

Reference

For registering the number of students, see p.154 “3-5 Class

Enter No.”.

LT/Photo Con-

trast

Specifies the contrast level for Letter/Photo when the power is

switched on or after mode settings are cleared.

Note

❒ Default: Standard

LT/Photo Priori- Specifies the screen image in Letter/Photo mode when you press

the [Original] key.

Note

❒ Default: Letter

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

No.

Mode

Description

Photo Contrast

Specifies the contrast level for Photo when the power is switched

on or after mode settings are cleared.

Note

❒ Default: Standard

Photo(Screen)

Specifies the screen image in Photo mode when you press the

[Original] key.

Note

❒ Default: Standard

Eco.Mode

ON/OFF

Specifies whether Economy Mode is set to “On” or “Off” when

the power is switched on or after mode settings are cleared.

Note

❒ Default: Off

Margin Eras.Area Adjusts the erase edges margin.

Note

❒ Default: 2 mm, 0.1"

Ratio Priority

You can set the primary ratio on the display when you press the

[Ratio] key.

4. Mode Setting

No.

Mode

Description

Auto Cycle

ON/OFF

Specifies whether Auto Cycle mode is selected at power on.

Note

❒ Default: ON

Class Manual Set Use one original or multiple originals in Manual Class mode.

Note

❒ Default: Std. (One original)

Ignore Paper Size If you are making prints on non-standard paper and the original

image does not entirely appear on the print, set paper size detec-

tion to “Ignore”. The machine will not detect the paper length.

Note

❒ Default: Not to ignore

No Orig. Size DF When you set long originals in the optional document feeder, set

original detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not detect the

original size.

Note

❒ Default: Not to ignore

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

No Orig. Size

When you place originals of non standard sizes on the exposure

glass, set original detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not de-

tect the original size.

Note

❒ Default: Not to ignore

Background

ON/OFF

When you make prints in Photo, Letter/Photo, or Tint mode, the

background of the prints might become dirty. Turn Background

“On” to improve the clarity of your prints.

Note

❒ Default: W/O back. correction (off)

Longer Paper

Combine

Use paper longer than 432mm, 17.0".

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

If you select “Automatic (Auto Combine mode)”, you can make

two or four identical images on one sheet by pressing the {Com-

bine} key and {Start} key.

Note

❒ Default: Normal (Combine Originals mode)

Reference

For using Auto Combine mode, see p.68 “Auto Combine

Mode”.

Comb. Sep. Line You can select a separation line in Memory Combine mode.

Note

❒ Default: None

❒ Available settings:

GRLINE0E

•

a = None

b = Solid

c = Broken1

d = Broken2

e = CropMarks

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

No.

Mode

Description

Cancel Comb.

Specifies whether Combine Originals or Memory Combine mode

is cleared after finishing your print job.

Note

❒ Default: Not to cancel

No. of Skip Feed Specifies the number of drum rotations in Skip Feed mode at

power on. You can also select whether you can change the num-

ber of drum rotations temporarily when you press the {Skip Feed}

key. See p.70 “Skip Feed Printing”.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Panel display: Display

Number of Skip Feed: 2

Reference

For changing the number of rotations, see p.156 “4-11 No. of

Skip Feed”.

Idling for Q.start When you use the Manual Quality Start mode, you can select

how many times the drum unit idles.

Note

❒ Default: 7

Setting Q.start

If the machine is not used for a long period of time, the ink on the

drum might dry causing image quality to deteriorate. The Auto

Quality Start mode automatically recovers image density quality

after a selected time has passed. If Auto Quality Start mode is set

to “Not to use”, you can regain print quality by making a few ex-

tra prints or you can use the Manual Quality Start mode.

Note

❒ Default: Yes

No. of Q.start

You can select how many times the drum unit idles after the dis-

played time periods have passed in Auto Quality Start mode.

Note

❒ Default: See p.157 “4-14 No. of Q.start”.

❒ To increase the print image density, increase the number of

drum rotations, and vice versa.

Reference

For changing the number of idle spins, see p.157 “4-14 No. of

Q.start”.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

Deflector Angle

You can change the angle of the wing guide depending on the pa-

per type you use.

Note

❒ Default: Auto

❒ Available settings:

•

Up (Select this setting when standard thickness or thin pa-

per misfeeds at the paper exit section occur frequently.)

Down (Select this setting when A4 – B5, 8¹/₂" × 11" thick

paper is not delivered properly to the paper delivery tray.)

Auto Class

When you do not use the Separation mode, you can select the ma-

chine's condition after each printing set is fed out to the paper de-

livery tray.

Note

❒ Default: Stop

❒ Available settings:

•

Start printing automatically (After the last page of each

printing set is fed out to the paper delivery tray, the ma-

chine stops for a few seconds. Then, the next cycle begins.)

Stop (After the last page of each printing set is fed out to

the paper delivery tray, the machine stops. If you press the

{Print} key, the next cycle begins.)

Auto Separate

Specifies whether Job Separation mode is automatically carried

out when you make prints in All Class, Auto Class, Manual Class,

or Class mode.

Note

❒ Default: ON

Ink/Master Left

Specifies whether you can check the amount of ink and master.

Note

❒ Default: OFF

❒ Available settings:

•

OFF (You cannot check the remaining amount of ink or

master.)

ON (When the remaining amount of ink or master is less

than half, the panel display indicates these amounts when

you turn on the main switch.)

•

Check remaining volume (You can see the remaining

amounts of ink and master regardless of these amounts.)

Type of Paper

When one kind of paper misfeed occur frequently, you can regis-

ter its paper type in “User1” or “User2”.

Reference

For registering a special paper type, see p.158 “4-19 Type of

Paper”.

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

No.

Mode

Description

Auto Rotation

When the direction in which your original is placed differs from

that of the paper, the machine automatically rotates the original

image by 90° to match the paper direction. You can cancel this

setting.

Note

❒ Default: ON

Master length

The machine determines the master length according to the num-

ber of originals placed in the optional document feeder and the

paper sizes. If you wish to use A3/11" × 17" master regardless of

the number of originals set and the paper sizes, select “A3”.

Note

❒ Default: Auto

Cancel Stor.O.lay Specifies whether settings for Storage Overlay are retained, or

not, when a storage overlay job has finished.

Note

❒ Default: Not to cancel

5. Stamp

No.

Mode

Description

Type

You can select the stamp message at power on with the Stamp

mode.

Note

❒ Default: CONFIDENTIAL

Size

You can edit the preset stamp sizes.

Note

❒ Default: Standard

❒ Adjustment values:

•

Double size

Stamp Density

Stamp Position

You can select the style of the stamps.

Note

❒ Default: Solid-fill

You can edit the preset stamp position.

Note

❒ Default: See p.159 “5-4 Stamp Position”.

❒ Available settings: See p.159 “5-4 Stamp Position”.

Reference

For adjusting the stamp position, see p.159 “5-4 Stamp Posi-

tion”.

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

No.

Mode

Description

Date Style Set

You can select the format of the date stamp.

Note

❒ Default: Month Day Year

Date Position Set You can select the date stamp direction at power on in Date Stamp

mode.

Note

❒ Default: Upper Left

Position(Date)

You can edit the date stamp position.

Note

❒ Default: See p.160 “5-7 Position (Date)”.

❒ Available settings: See p.160 “5-7 Position (Date)”.

Reference

For adjusting the date stamp position, see p.160 “5-7 Position

(Date)”.

Type(Page)

You can select the page numbering style at power on in Page

Stamp mode.

Note

❒ Default: P1,P2

Direction(Page)

You can select the page numbering direction at power on in Page

Stamp mode.

Note

❒ Default:

•

When you select “P1,P2” or “1/5,2/5” with the

“Type(Page)” user tool: Upper Right

When you select “-1-,-2-” with the “Type(Page)” user tool:

Down Center

Position(Page)

You can edit the page numbering position.

Note

❒ Default: See p.161 “5-10 Position (Page)”.

❒ Available settings: See p.161 “5-10 Position (Page)”.

Reference

For adjusting the page numbering position, see p.161 “5-10 Po-

sition (Page)”.

Make/Chg. Pat- Make your own background pattern in Make-up mode.

tern

Note

❒ You can edit the 40 preset patterns.

Reference

For changing the background pattern, see p.163 “5-11

Make/Chg. Pattern”.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

6. Administrator Mode

❖ User Codes

If user codes are turned on, operators must enter their user codes before they can operate

the machine. The machine keeps count of the number of copies made under each user code.

Turn this function on with the “Set User Code(s)” user tool. You can also turn on Key Op-

erator Code mode so that only the key operator (administrator) can use the functions below.

Check Counter

Reset Counters

You can check the number of masters and copies made under

each user code.

Reference

For checking the number of masters and copies, see p.164

“6-1 Check Counter”.

You can clear each or all user code counters.

Note

❒ Default: Single

Reference

For clearing the number of masters and copies, see p.164 “6-

2 Reset Counters ”.

Set User Code

Selects User Code mode. For details about User Code mode, see

p.150 “6. Administrator Mode” Use Code(s).

Enter the key Operator Code if you have already set it. See

p.150 “6. Administrator Mode”.

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

Reg. User Code

Chg. User Code

You can register user codes.

Note

❒ Up to 20 user codes (up to 4 digits) can be registered.

You can change user codes.

Note

❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added to

that made under the new user code.

Reference

For changing the user codes, see p.165 “6-5 Chg. User

Code”.

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools Menu

Del. User Code

You can delete user codes.

Note

❒ The number of copies made under the deleted code is also

deleted.

Reference

For deleting user codes, see p.166 “6-6 Del. User Code”.

Key Operator Code Use to turn Key Operator Code mode on or off.

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

Reg/Chg Key-

OpCode

You can register or change key operator codes. (up to 4 digits)

Restrict. Access

In Key Counter mode, you have to set the key counter before

making prints. (To turn on Key Counter mode, contact your

service representative.) If Key Counter mode is on, Restricted

Access is turned on (“To use”) automatically. If you turn Re-

stricted Access off (“Not to use”), you can make prints without

inserting the key counter.

Note

❒ Default: Not to use

7. On Line Mode

No.

Mode

Description

Set aut-O/L def

Specifies whether Auto On Line mode is set to “On” or “Off”

when power is switched on or after mode settings are cleared.

Note

❒ Default: On

Ppr. Size [Online]

List/Test Print

Print PS Errors

Specifies the paper size when you press the {On Line} key.

Note

❒ Default: Auto

Prints the current set content of this machine.

Note

❒ Default: System Print

Setting for when printing the PS Error List when a PostScript er-

ror occurs.

Note

❒ Default: Off

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

No.

Mode

Description

IP Address

Sets the IP Address.

Note

❒ Default: 011.022.033.044

Reference

See the Printer Reference 1 for information about the IP Ad-

dress setting.

Ethernet Speed

Network

Sets the Ethernet communication speed.

Note

❒ Default: Auto

Sets the Network boot.

Note

❒ Default: NONE

Reference

See the Printer Reference 1 for information about the Net-

work boot setting.

I/O Timeout

Sets the time to enable the interface after data stops being re-

ceived. When the time set here is exceeded, it will be possible to

receive data from the other interface.

Important

❒ If the set time is too short, a time out might occur while one

data is being received. As a result, data from another inter-

face might cut in and be printed, or the emulation retrieval

from half of the data may be activated, and be replaced with

a different emulation.

Note

❒ Default: 30 sec.

I/O Buffer

Sets the capacity of the reception buffer.

Note

❒ Default: 512KB

Menu Reset

You can reset the factory settings. However, the “IP Address”,

“Network”, and the “Ethernet Speed” settings do not change.

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus in Detail

E Press the {q} key.

1-6 Time Setting

A Press the {User Tools} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

F Enter the month with the number

ZDZS110N

keys.

G Press the {q} key.

B Make sure that “1” is selected,

and then press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ Follow steps F and G for the

"date", "hour", "minute", and

"second".

H Press the [OK] key.

C Enter 6 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

D Enter the year with the number

keys.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

F Enter the desired ratio with the

3-4 Reproduction Ratio

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

Note

A Press the {User Tools} key.

❒ You can also enter the ratio with

the number keys.

G Press the [OK] key twice.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

3-5 Class Enter No.

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

A Press the {User Tools} key.

ZDZS110N

B Enter 3 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

C Enter 4 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

B Enter 3 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

D Select the ratio you want to adjust

with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

C Enter 5 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

E Press the [Adjust.] key.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus in Detail

D Select the grade with the [←] [→] H Press the [OK] key.

or {~} {}} keys.

Note

❒ Repeat steps D through H until

you have finished registering

the number of students in each

class for the each grades.

I Press the [OK] key.

3-11 Margin Erase Area

E Press the [Enter] key.

A Press the {User Tools} key.

F Select the class with the [←] [→]

or {~} {}} keys.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

G Enter the number of students

with the number keys, and then

press the {q} key.

B Enter 3 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

C Enter 11 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

Note

❒ Repeat steps F and G until you

have finished registering the

number of students in each

class.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

C Enter the vertical length with

D Select the original size you will

use with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

the number keys.

D Press the {q} key.

E Enter the horizontal width

with the number keys.

F Press the {q} key.

G Press the [OK] key twice.

4-11 No. of Skip Feed

The following procedure explains

how to change the number of drum

rotations.

E Press the [Select] key.

F Adjust the erase edge margin.

A Press the {User Tools} key.

If you selected A3 to A6 or 11" ×

17" to 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

A Adjust the erase edge margin

with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

B Enter 4 with the number keys,

and then press the [OK] or {q}

key.

Note

❒ You can also enter the ratio

with the number keys and

the {q} key.

C Enter 11 with the number keys,

and then press the [OK] or {q}

key.

If you selected p

A Enter the erase edge margin

with the number keys.

B Press the {q} key.

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus in Detail

D Press the [Change] key.

4-14 No. of Q.start

Note

❒ The default settings are as follows.

Time period

E Change the number of drum rota-

tions while one sheet of paper is

fed with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

Low Tmp.

15 45 45

Normal Tmp.

15 15

High Tmp.

(10 – 15°C, 50 – 59°F)

(15 – 28°C, 59 – 82.4°F)

(28 – 30°C, 82.4 – 86°F)

A Press the {User Tools} key.

Note

❒ You can also change the num-

ber of rotations with the num-

ber keys.

Image Density

Lighter

F Press the [OK] key.

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

B Enter 4 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

C Enter 14 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

D Select the temperature at which

you use this machine with the [←]

[→] or {~} {}} keys.

4-19 Type of Paper

A Press the {User Tools} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

E Press the [OK] key.

ZDZS110N

F Select the time period (hours) the

drum unit idles for with the [←]

[→] or {~} {}} keys.

B Enter 4 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

C Enter 19 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Select the number of drum rota-

tions with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

D Select [User1] or [User2] with the

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

I Press the [OK] key.

E Press the [OK] key.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus in Detail

Stamp

positions

Default

Available

settings

F Select the paper type and misfeed

condition with the [←] or [→] key.

a = 24mm,

0.96"

a = 8 –

104mm,

0.32" – 4.16"

b = 24mm,

0.96"

b = 8 –

144mm,

GRSPOS3E

0.32" – 5.76"

a = 24mm,

0.96"

a = 8 –

104mm,

0.32" – 4.16"

b = 0mm, 0"

b = – 72 –

72mm, –

2.88" – 2.88"

c = center

line

G Press the [OK] key.

GRSPOS4E

H Press the [Cancel] key.

a = 24mm,

0.96"

a = 8 –

104mm,

0.32" – 4.16"

5-4 Stamp Position

b = 24mm,

0.96"

b = 8 –

144mm,

0.32" – 5.76"

GRSPOS5E

Note

❒ The default position and available

settings of each stamp are as fol-

lows.

a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –

52mm, –

2.08" – 2.08"

b = 24mm,

0.96"

Stamp

Default

Available

settings

b = 8 –

144mm,

0.32" – 5.76"

c = center

line

positions

GRSPOS6E

a = 24mm,

0.96"

a = 8 –

104mm,

0.32" – 4.16"

a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –

52mm, –

2.08" – 2.08"

b = 24mm,

0.96"

b = 0mm, 0"

b = 8 –

144mm,

0.32" – 5.76"

c = center

line

GPSPOS0E

b = – 72 –

72mm, –

GRSPOS7E

2.88" – 2.88"

a = 24mm,

0.96"

a = 8 –

104mm,

0.32" – 4.16"

a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –

52mm, –

2.08" – 2.08"

b = 0mm, 0"

b = 24mm,

0.96"

b = – 72 –

72mm, –

2.88" – 2.88"

c = center

line

GRSPOS1E

b = 8 –

144mm,

0.32" – 5.76"

c = center

line

GRSPOS8E

a = 24mm,

0.96"

a = 8 –

104mm,

0.32" – 4.16"

b = 24mm,

0.96"

b = 8 –

144mm,

GRSPOS2E

0.32" – 5.76"

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

Note

A Press the {User Tools} key.

❒ The value increases or decreases

in 4mm, 0.16" steps.

G Adjust the vertical stamp position

with the {|} or {{} key.

Image Density

Stamp

On Line

Lighter

H Press the [OK] key twice.

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

5-7 Position (Date)

ZDZS110N

Note

B Enter 5 with the number keys,

❒ The default position and available

settings of each date stamp are as

follows.

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

Stamp

positions

Default

Available

settings

a = 8mm,

0.32"

a = 8 –

40mm,0.32"

– 1.60"

C Enter 4 with the number keys,

dd.mm.yy

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

b = 20mm,

0.80"

b = 8 –

40mm,0.32"

– 1.60"

GRDPOS0E

D Select the stamp position you

want with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}

keys.

dd.mm.yy

GRDPOS1E

a = 20mm,

0.80"

b = 12mm,

0.48"

GRDPOS2E

a = 20mm,

0.80"

E Press the [Change] key.

b = 8mm,

0.32"

F Adjust the horizontal stamp posi-

tion with the {|} or {{} key, and

then press the {}} key.

GRDPOS3E

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus in Detail

A Press the {User Tools} key.

F Adjust the horizontal date stamp

position with the {|} or {{} key,

and then press the {}} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

Note

❒ The value increases or decreases

in 4mm, 0.16" steps.

ZDZS110N

B Enter 5 with the number keys,

G Adjust the vertical date stamp po-

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

sition with the {|} or {{} key.

H Press the [OK] key twice.

5-10 Position (Page)

C Enter 7 with the number keys,

Note

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

❒ The default position and available

settings of each page stamp are as

follows.

❖ P1 or ¹/₅

D Select the date stamp position

you want to adjust with the [←]

[→] or {~} {}} keys.

Stamp

positions

Default

Available

settings

a = 8mm,

0.32"

a = 8 –

40mm,0.32"

– 1.60"

P.1

b = 12mm,

0.48"

b = 8 –

40mm,0.32"

– 1.60"

GRPPOS0E

a = 12mm,

0.48"

b = 12mm,

0.48"

GRPPOS1E

E Press the [Change] key.

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

❖ -1-

D Select the page numbering direc-

tion you want to adjust with the

[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.

Stamp

positions

Default

Available

settings

a = 8mm,

0.32"

a = 8 –

40mm,0.32"

– 1.60"

–1–

GRPPOS2E

a = 8mm,

0.32"

a = 8 –

40mm,0.32"

– 1.60"

E Press the [Change] key.

GRPPOS3E

F Adjust the horizontal page num-

bering position with the {|} or

{{} key, and then press the {}}

key.

A Press the {User Tools} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Note

Auto On Line

Make-Up

❒ The value increases or decreases

ZDZS110N

in 4mm, 0.16" increments.

G Adjust the vertical page number-

ing position with the {|} or {{}

key.

B Enter 5 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

Note

❒ You need not follow step G

when you select “-1-” as the di-

rection in step D.

C Enter 10 with the number keys.

Then press the [OK] or {q} key.

H Press the [OK] key twice.

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus in Detail

G Pressthe{q}or{Clear/Stop}keyto

5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern

edit the pattern.

A Press the {User Tools} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

Note

❒ To add a dot, press the {q} key.

B Enter 5 with the number keys,

❒ To remove a dot, press the

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

{Clear/Stop} key.

❒ Repeat steps F and G until you

have finished editing the pat-

tern.

H Press the [OK] key twice.

C Enter 11 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

D Select the background pattern

with the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}

key.

E Press the [Change] key.

F {Move the cursor to the position you

wish to edit with the {~}, {}}, {|},

or {{} keys.}

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

D Keep pressing the [→] or {}} key

to display the number of masters

and prints made under your user

code.

6-1 Check Counter

A Press the {User Tools} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

E Press the [OK] key after checking

the number of masters and prints

made under your user code.

B Enter 6 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

6-2 Reset Counters

A Press the {User Tools} key.

C Make sure that 1 is selected, and

then press the [OK] key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

B Enter 6 with the number keys,

Note

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

❒ The number of masters and

prints made under the first user

code will be displayed in the

panel display.

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tool Menus in Detail

C Enter 2 with the number keys,

and then press the [OK] or {q}

key.

6-5 Chg. User Code

A Press the {User Tools} key.

D Select [Single] or [All] with the [←]

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

[→] or {~} {}} keys.

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

B Enter 6 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

E Press the [OK] key.

If you selected [Single]

C Enter 5 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

A Keep pressing the [→] or {}}

key to display the number of

masters and prints made under

your user code.

D Keeppressingthe[→]or{}}keyto

display your user code.

B Press the [OK] key.

C Press the [Yes] key.

D Press the [Cancel] key twice.

E Press the [OK] key.

If you selected [All]

A Press the [Yes] key.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User Tools

F Enter the new user code with the D Keep pressing the [→] or {}} key

number keys.

to display your user code.

E Press the [OK] key.

G Press the [OK] key.

F Press the [Yes] key.

6-6 Del. User Code

A Press the {User Tools} key.

Image Density

Lighter

Stamp

On Line

Normal

Darker 1

Darker 2

Auto On Line

Make-Up

ZDZS110N

B Enter 6 with the number keys,

andthenpressthe[OK]or{q}key.

C Enter 6 with the number keys,

and then press the [OK] or {q}

key.

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Troubleshooting

If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You

Want

If a malfunction or a misfeed occurs, the following messages will appear on the

panel display.

Message

Meaning

Check the original direc- The paper is not placed in the same direction as the original.

tion.

Place the original in the same direction as the paper.

If you press the {Print} key, the selected paper will be used for print-

ing.

Size of original and pa- Set a paper size that matches the reproduction ratio you have select-

per is not the same.

ed and your original.

The reproduction ratio selected by Auto Magnification mode is too

big or too small.

Note

❒ You can make prints if you press the {Print} key.

Set original.

Make prints after confirming whether there is an original on the ex-

posure glass.

Make sure that you have changed the original on the exposure glass

before pressing the {Start } key.

Max. quantity: ****

Min. quantity: ****

The number of prints exceeds the maximum print quantity.

You can change the maximum number of prints that can be made in

one operation with the user tools. See “Max. Quantity” on p.142 “2.

Set Operat'n Mode ”.

The number of prints does not exceed the minimum print quantity.

You can change the minimum number of prints that can be made in

one operation with the user tools. See “Min. Quantity” on p.142 “2.

Set Operat'n Mode”.

Drum unit is not set. Set Slide in the drum until it clicks.

Drum unit.

Make sure that the drum is completely set in position.

Communication error

Turn the main switch off and on.

Turn the main switch off If the message appears again, contact your service representative.

then on

Overloaded for the de-

livery tray

Remove the paper from the delivery tray.

Reference

Please remove the paper

See “Delivery Capacity” on p.142 “2. Set Operat'n Mode”.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

Message

Meaning

Print image is larger

The master image previously printed is larger than the paper, the

than the selected paper image exceeds the paper size.

size.

Make prints again after pressing the [Exit] key and selecting the pa-

Change the paper size.

per size again.

Note

❒ If you press the [Exit] key to erase the message and press the

{Print} key, the machine starts to make the prints. However, the

image might not fit on the paper.

-When a service call message is shown on the panel display

Press the [Exit] key. Then turn the main switch off and back on again. If a service

code appears again, contact your service representative.

Note

❒ If a service code appears on the panel display after you turn the main switch

off and on a few times, do not continue turning it on and off. Leave the ma-

chine off.

❒ When you make masters continuously using originals with solid images,

“SC-03-03” tends to appear on the panel display. In this case, turn off the main

switch and wait for a while. Then turn on the main switch.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If You Cannot Make Prints as You Want

Problem

Cause

Action

Misfeeds occur frequently.

Improper paper type is select- Select proper paper type. See

ed.

p.43 “Printing onto Various

Kinds of Paper”.

When you try to set several

functions at a time, you can-

not set some functions.

Some functions cannot be

used together.

See p.135 “Combination

Chart”.

Parts of the image are not

printed in Edge Erase mode.

Erase margin is too wide.

Set a narrower erase margin

with the user tools. See p.155

“3-11 Margin Erase Area”.

Edge margins of original are

too narrow.

Prints are blank or parts of the The paper feed side plates are Make sure that the paper feed

image are not printed.

not set correctly.

side plates touch the paper

lightly and the proper paper

size is displayed in the panel

display.

2nd printing with another

drum is unsatisfactory.

The 1st print image is still wet. Wait until the 1st image be-

comes dry.

An uneven solid image ap-

pears.

Large solid image wrinkles

the master.

Increase the print speed or se-

lect photo mode.

Combine Originals Mode

Problem

Cause

Action

Prints are blank or parts of the Original size and direction are You cannot use originals of

image are not printed.

not correct.

different sizes and directions

in Combine Originals mode.

Use originals of same size and

direction.

Print image is not correct.

Original set order is not cor-

rect.

Place originals face up in the

optional document feeder.

The first original should be on

top.

Place original face down on

the exposure glass. The first

original should be set first.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

Loading Paper

The Load Paper indicator (B) lights

when the paper feed tray runs out of

paper.

B Adjust the paper feed side plates

to match the paper size.

Limitation

❒ Load paper when the paper feed

tray is completely empty. If you

add paper when some paper is left

in the tray, it may cause multiple

feeds or misfeeds.

Reference

For available paper sizes, see p.11

“Print Paper”.

Note

❒ Make sure that the paper size

and direction shown on the

panel display match the size

and direction of paper loaded in

the paper feed tray.

A Load the paper in the paper feed

tray.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x Clearing Misfeeds

R CAUTION:

• Be careful not to cut yourself on

any sharp edges when you reach

inside the machine to remove

misfed sheets of paper or mas-

ters.

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

Check the following before restarting

the printing run.

• Did you select an appropriate pa-

per type with the [Ppr.Type] key?

Note

❒ After clearing misfeeds, make sure

that all the doors, covers, and units

are closed and the x indicator is

off.

❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave

any torn scraps of paper, originals,

or masters in the machine.

❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not

turn off the main switch. If you do,

your print settings will be cleared.

• Are the side pads in the correct po-

sitions?

❒ If misfeeds occur repeatedly,

please contact your service repre-

sentative.

”x + A” Paper Misfeeds in the

Paper Feed Section

To print on thin paper (47.1g/m²,

12.5 lb), slide the levers behind the

paper feed side plates in the direc-

tion of the arrow (see illustration).

A Remove the misfed paper.

• When paper is curled, correct as

shown.

Z066

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

• When paper edges stick together

or paper is not fed in, fan the paper

as shown.

”x + A + B” Paper Misfeeds in

the Paper Feed Section

A Open the front door.

B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).

Z067

• When printing onto postcards or

thick paper, lower the printing

speed to setting 1 or 2. See p.27

“Changing the Printing Speed”.

C Take out the drum.

• When a multiple feed occurs or the

paper comes out skewed, make

sure that the paper feed side plates

are properly adjusted. When you

load paper on the paper feed tray,

make sure that the paper edge

touches the back fence and paper is

placed on the proper paper size

scale. Only use paper where the

leading edge has two right angle

corners.

Note

❒ For taking out the drum unit,

see p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

D Gently pull out the misfed paper

from the inside.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x Clearing Misfeeds

E If you cannot remove the misfed C Take out the drum.

paper, remove it from the paper

feed tray.

F Set the drum unit and close the

Note

❒ For setting the drum unit, see

Note

p.130 “Changing the Color

❒ For taking out the drum unit,

see p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

D While pressing the drum lock,

grasp the edge of the master (the

white area) and peel it off.

See p.171 “”x + A” Paper Misfeeds

in the Paper Feed Section”.

”x + B” Paper or Master

Wrapped Around the Drum

E Return the drum lock to its origi-

When the master is wrapped around the

drum

nal position.

F Set the drum unit and close the

A Open the front door.

B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).

Note

❒ For setting the drum unit, see

p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

When paper is wrapped around the drum

A Open the front cover.

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).

When paper is misfed inside the machine

A Open the front cover.

B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).

C Take out the drum.

Note

❒ For taking out the drum unit,

see p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

Note

D Remove the misfed paper from

❒ For taking out the drum unit,

see p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

the drum.

D Remove the misfed paper from

the inside as shown in the illus-

tration.

E If you cannot find misfed paper

around the drum (as in step D),

check the pressure cylinder. Re-

move any misfed paper.

F Set the drum unit and close the

E If you cannot remove the misfed

paper, remove paper from the

pressure cylinder.

Note

❒ For setting the drum unit, see

p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x Clearing Misfeeds

F Set the drum unit and close the

”x + C” Paper Misfeeds in the

Paper Exit Section

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

Note

❒ For setting the drum unit, see

p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

A Slowly, but firmly pull out the

misfed paper.

-To prevent paper misfeeds:

If the paper is curled or the original's

leading edge margin is too narrow,

the following action is necessary.

• When you use curled paper, cor-

rect as shown.

When thin paper misfeeds in the pa-

per exit section, reduce the printing

speed with the {W}{V} {Speed} keys.

See p.27 “Changing the Printing

Speed”. If you cannot reduce the

printing speed, close the trailing edge

guides or move the end plate toward

the paper delivery tray edge.

Z066

• When the leading edge margin of

the original is less than 8mm, 0.32"

or there is a solid image on the

leading edge, insert the original

with the widest margin first or

make a leading edge margin by

making a copy.

* Less than 8mm, 0.32"

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

G Position the master roll so that the

edge reaches the interior of the

master holder.

”x + D” Master Misfeeds in

the Master Feed Section

A Pull out the master tray until it

stops.

B Open the master guide.

H Close the master guide.

C Open the master tray cover (1).

D Remove the master roll (2).

I Push in the master tray until it

stops.

”x + D + B” Master Misfeeds

in the Master Feed Section

E Reset the master roll (1).

A Open the front door.

Note

B Lower drum unit look lever (B1).

❒ The master roll must be posi-

tioned as shown in the illustra-

tion in step F.

F Close the master tray cover (2).

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x Clearing Misfeeds

C Take out the drum.

”x + B + E” Master Misfeeds

in the Master Eject Section

A Open the front door.

B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).

C Take out the drum.

Note

❒ For taking out the drum unit,

see p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

D Pull out the misfed master from

inside.

E Set the drum unit and close the

Note

❒ For taking out the drum unit,

see p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

Note

❒ For setting the drum unit, see

p.130 “Changing the Color

Drum Unit”.

D Grasp handle (E1) and pull out

the master eject unit until it stops.

E 1

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

E Pull out lever (E3) and remove the

”x + E” Master Misfeeds in

the Master Eject Section

misfed master.

A Open the front door.

B Grasp handle (E1) and pull out

the master eject unit until it stops.

E 1

C Check where the misfed master

F Return lever (E3) and the master

eject unit to their original posi-

tions.

is. Remove the misfed master.

G Set the drum unit and close the